Wireless network and method for suggesting corrective action and restricting communications in response to detecting communications errors

ABSTRACT

A mobile wireless network and a method of operation provide analysis of mobile wireless device communications and suggested corrective initiated upon detecting communications performance issues.

The present Application is a Continuation of U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 16/557,277 filed on Aug. 30, 2019 and published as U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 20200015039 on Jan. 9, 2020, which is aContinuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/116,215 filed onAug. 29, 2018 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 10,448,209 on Oct. 15, 2019,which is a Continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/880,852filed on Jan. 26, 2018 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 10,390,175 on Aug.20, 2019, which is a Continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/717,138 filed on Sep. 27, 2017 and issued as U.S. Pat. No. 9,918,196on Mar. 13, 2018, which is a Continuation of U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 15/468,265 filed on Mar. 24, 2017 and issued as U.S. Pat. No.9,888,353 on Feb. 6, 2018, which is a Continuation of U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 15/297,222, filed on Oct. 19, 2016, and issued asU.S. Pat. No. 9,642,024 on May 2, 2017, which is a Continuation of U.S.patent application Ser. No. 14/642,408, filed on Mar. 9, 2015 and issuedas U.S. Pat. No. 9,510,320 on Nov. 29, 2016, which is a Continuation ofU.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/505,578, filed on Aug. 17, 2006 andissued as U.S. Pat. No. 8,977,284 on Mar. 10, 2015, which is aContinuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/255,552,filed on Sep. 24, 2002 and published as U.S. Patent Publication No.20030134648 on Jul. 17, 2003, and claims priority thereto under 35U.S.C. § 120. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/255,552 claimspriority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) to U.S. Provisional Patent ApplicationSer. No. 60/327,327 filed on Oct. 4, 2001, U.S. Provisional PatentApplication Ser. No. 60/383,528 filed on May 28, 2002, U.S. ProvisionalPatent Application Ser. No. 60/352,761 filed on Jan. 29, 2002, U.S.Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/335,203 filed on Oct. 23,2001, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/383,529 filed onMay 28, 2002, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/391,469filed on Jun. 26, 2002, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No.60/353,379 filed on Jan. 30, 2002 and U.S. Provisional PatentApplication Ser. No. 60/381,249 filed on May 16, 2002. The disclosuresof all of the above-referenced U.S. Patent Applications are incorporatedherein by reference.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed generally to a system and method forproviding navigation using mobile wireless devices, and morespecifically to a mobile wireless device having both on-line andoff-line navigation capabilities.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Wireless networks 100 are becoming increasingly important worldwide.Wireless networks 100 are rapidly replacing conventional wire-basedtelecommunications systems in many applications. Cellular radiotelephone networks (“CRT”), and specialized mobile radio and mobile dataradio networks are examples. The general principles of wireless cellulartelephony have been described variously, for example in U.S. Pat. No.5,295,180 to Vendetti, et al., which is incorporated herein byreference. There is great interest in using existing infrastructures ofwireless networks 100 for locating people and/or objects in a costeffective manner. Such a capability would be invaluable in a variety ofsituations, especially in emergency or crime situations. Due to thesubstantial benefits of such a location system, several attempts havebeen made to design and implement such a system. Systems have beenproposed that rely upon signal strength and triangulation techniques topermit location include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,818,998 and4,908,629 to Apsell et al. (“the Apsell patents”) and U.S. Pat. No.4,891,650 to Sheffer (“the Sheffer patent”). However, these systems havedrawbacks that include high expense in that special purpose electronicsare required.

Furthermore, the systems are generally only effective in line-of-sightconditions, such as rural settings. Radio wave multipath, refractionsand ground clutter cause significant problems in determining thelocation of a signal source in most geographical areas that are morethan sparsely populated. Moreover, these drawbacks are particularlyexacerbated in dense urban canyon (city) areas, where errors and/orconflicts in location measurements can result in substantialinaccuracies.

Another example of a location system using time difference of arrival(TDOA) and triangulation for location are satellite-based systems, suchas the military and commercial versions of the global positioningsatellite system (GPS). GPS can provide accurate position from atime-based signal received simultaneously from at least threesatellites. A ground-based GPS receiver at or near the object to belocated determines the difference between the time at which eachsatellite transmits a time signal and the time at which the signal isreceived and, based on the time differentials, determines the object'slocation. However, the GPS is impractical in many applications. Thesignal power levels from the satellites are low and the GPS receiverrequires a clear, line-of-sight path to at least three satellites abovea horizon greater than about 60 degrees for effective operation.Accordingly, inclement weather conditions, such as clouds_, terrainfeatures, such as hills and trees, and buildings restrict the ability ofthe GPS receiver to determine its position. Furthermore, the initial GPSsignal detection process for a GPS receiver can be relatively long(i.e., several minutes) for determining the receiver's position. Suchdelays are unacceptable in many applications such as, for example,emergency response and vehicle tracking. Additionally there exists noone place that this location information is stored such that a pluralityof wireless devices 104 could be located on a geographic basis.

Summary of Factors Affecting RF Propagation

The physical radio propagation channel perturbs signal strength, causingrate changes, phase delay, low signal to noise ratios (e.g., ell for theanalog case, or E_(b)/no, RF energy per bit, over average noise densityratio for the digital case) and doppler-shift. Signal strength isusually characterized by:

-   Free space path loss (L_(p))-   Slow fading loss or margin (L_(slow))-   Fast fading loss or margin (L_(fast))

Loss due to slow fading includes shadowing due to clutter blockage(sometimes included in 1.p). Fast fading is composed of multipathreflections which cause: 1) delay spread; 2) random phase shift orrayleigh fading, and 3) random frequency modulation due to differentdoppler shifts on different paths.

Summing the path loss and the two fading margin loss components from theabove yields a total path loss of:

L _(total) =L _(p) ±L _(slow) +L _(fast)

Referring to FIG. 3, the figure illustrates key components of a typicalcellular and PCS power budget design process. The cell designerincreases the transmitted power P_(TX) by the shadow fading marginL_(slow) which is usually chosen to be within the 1-2 percentile of theslow fading probability density function (PDF) to minimize theprobability of unsatisfactorily low received power level P_(RX) at thereceiver. The P_(RX) level must have enough signal to noise energy level(e.g., 10 dB) to overcome the receiver's internal noise level (e.g.,−118 dBm in the case of cellular 0.9 GHz), for a minimum voice qualitystandard. Thus in the example P_(RX) must never be below −108 dBm, inorder to maintain the quality standard. Additionally the short term fastsignal fading due to multipath propagation is taken into account bydeploying fast fading margin L_(fast), which is typically also chosen tobe a few percentiles of the fast fading distribution. The 1 to 2percentiles compliment other network blockage guidelines. For examplethe cell base station traffic loading capacity and network transportfacilities are usually designed for a 1-2 percentile blockage factor aswell. However, in the worst-case scenario both fading margins aresimultaneously exceeded, thus causing a fading margin overload.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PRIOR ART

Turning to FIG. 1 is a typical second-generation wireless network 100architecture designed for a code division multiple access (CDMA) and issimilar for a time division multiple access (TOMA) or others such asGSM. These are all digital systems that may or may not have the abilityto operate in an analog mode. A general overview of the operation ofthis system will begin when the wireless device user 102 initiates acall with the wireless device 104. A wireless device 104 may take theform of a wireless device 104, personal digital assistant (PDA), laptopcomputer, personal communications system, vehicle mounted system, etc.Radio frequency (RF) signal 106 is sent from the wireless device 104 toa radio tower and base-station transceiver subsystem (BTS) 300 (FIG. 3),having a global positioning system (GPS) receiver 110-A, 110.8, or 110-Cas part of the BTS. The GPS receiver 302 (described in FIG. 3) receivesa GPS satellite network signal 112 from the GPS satellite network 114,used by the radio tower with network BTS 108 for timing information.That information is used by the BTS to synchronize the communicationssignal and allow decoding of the digitized wireless device 104 radiofrequency signal 106. The call is then carried from the radio tower andBTS with GPS receiver 110⋅A, 110-B, or 110-C through a wired link 116via a T1, T3, microwave link, etc, to the base station controller (BSC)118-A with vocording 120, CIS 122, and a backhaul 1/F 124, where thecall is formatted and coded into data packets by the BSS manager 126 viaan intersystem logical connection 128. The call is then sent to theswitch 130 via intersystem logical connections 132, where the call isthen forwarded through intersystem logical connections 150 to the PSTN138. The call may also be directly routed to another wireless device 104on the wireless network 100.

From the PSTN 138, the call is forwarded through a connection from thePSTN 138 to communications link 140 and then to land lines 142. As thecall proceeds, the words or data from the wireless device user 102 andthe ultimate person or device at the receiving end of the call, areformatted, coded and decoded again and again, in the manor describedabove, throughout the conversation as the conversation or data volleysback and forth. Turning to FIG. 2 is a typical third generation (3G)wireless network 200. The only major difference between the secondgeneration wireless network 100 and third generation wireless network's200 architecture is the addition of a packet data service node (PDSN)202 and in the inner system logical connection 204 which connects thePDSN 202 to the BSC 118-B. However, It should be noted that theexpansions in architecture do not affect current implementation of thismachine and/or process as described by this patent. The methodology isthe same as in the second generation wireless network 100 (FIG. 1) andfor completeness the periphery 3G 200 components and their logicallocations have been shown.

As other technologies in network design emerge, it is important torealize that modifications and improvements can be made to this designand patent while retaining the spirit in which it was written. FIG. 1and FIG. 2 demonstrates the logical locations in which this patentapplies to current technology. It is both obvious and required that somechanges would have to be made to accommodate future technologies andagain are understood to be within the spirit of this patent.

Ability to Locate Wireless Device

There are numerous methods for obtaining the location of a wirelessdevice 104, which have been taught in the prior art. Most common are inwireless networks (CDMA, TOMA, GSM, etc). All of these wireless networks100 currently use similar hardware, which these patented locationmethods take advantage of.

Referring now to FIG. 3, details of a typical three sector radio tower110-A. The BTS 300 with a GPS receiver 302 are shown. This radio tower110⋅A exists in most current wireless networks 100 (FIG. 1) and 200(FIG. 2) and is used most commonly. Its inclusion is for completeness ofthis document.

Still referring to FIG. 3, the typical three sector radio tower 110-Awith BTS 300 setup includes a BSC 118-A, and 118-B which is connected toa BTS 300 through a T1 116 or a microwave link 304. The GPS has areceiver 302 that is used in its operation to establish timinginformation for communication synchronization. The radio tower 110-A has3 sectors. Each sector comprises one primary receive antenna 306-A,308-A, 310-A, and one diversity receive antenna 306-C, 308-C, 310-C.Each sector also has one transmit antenna 306-B, 308-B, 310-B. Thesereceiver antennas and transmit antennas are elevated by the radio towerpole 312 and connected to the BTS by antenna leads 314.

FIG. 4 illustrates the typical footprint characteristics (side view) ofa typical three-sector radio tower antenna 110-A, such as described inFIG. 3. Each sector has a primary lobe 400 (which corresponds with itsprimary directivity), multiple side lobes 402-A and 402-B, and multiplerear lobes 404.

FIG. 5 illustrates the typical footprint characteristics (top view) of atypical threesector radio tower antenna 110-A, such as described in FIG.3. Each sector has a primary lobe 400 (which corresponds with itsprimary directivity), multiple side lobes 402-A, and 402-B, and multiplerear lobes 404.

Location Determined as Follows:

As many other patents go into great depth on location-based methods, forcompleteness, a brief description of the methods preferred by thispatent will be discussed.

FIG. 6 shows general methods for triangulation with three radio towers;110-A, 110-B, and 110-C. This method is covered in numerous otherpatents but the basic idea is included for completeness.

Still referring to FIG. 6 round trip delay (RTD) from each radio towerand BTS 110-A, 110-B and 110-C is used to calculate distance from radiotowers to the wireless device 104. To calculate distance 600-A, 600-B,and 600-C, take the RTD (unit in seconds) and multiply by the speed oflight (or speed in relative medium of propagation) and divide by two.

RTD*c/2·D, D=Distance in meters from tower (c=speed of light)

Having done so, you can calculate the position, relative to the knowngeological position of the towers 110-A, 110-B, and 110-C, of thewireless device 104.

To calculate position you find the intersection of three concentricspheres around each radio tower and BTS 110-A, 110-B, and 110-C witheach radius equaling the distance 600-A, 600-B, and 600-C to thewireless device 104 from that radio tower and BTS. The wireless device104 location is the intersection of the three spheres.

FIG. 7 shows a two-tower location finding method as taught in the priorart. It is included for completeness of this document. It uses twotowers 110-A, and 11 OB with a wireless device 104 at distances of700-A, and 700-B.

Because each tower has more than one sector, as the wireless device 104approaches a radio tower 110-A or 11 O⋅B, it may be talking to more thanone sector on a single radio tower as is illustrated in FIG. 4, FIG. 5,and FIG. 6. When this occurs, there is a critical distance below whichthe time it takes for two sectors on a single tower to reach thewireless device 104 is indistinguishable due to hardware calculationlimitations. This would make the distance from both sectors (which arealready very close, being located on the same tower) appear the same. Inthis case you should regard the tower as having only one sector,characterized by the distance (equal) from the two sectors. Now, usingthis as a base you can calculate the location at the wireless device 104by examining the intersection on the two spheres (one from each tower)and the intersection of the vertical plane between the two towers 110-Aand 110-8. This should result in a single point and hence the locationof the wireless device 104.

FIG. 8 shows a one-tower 110-A location method. It shows a tower (3sectors) and three distances 800-A, 800-8, 800-C from a wireless device104.

In this case, the wireless device 104 has approached a radio tower 110-Aso closely that is talking to three sectors on the site. Because, atthis proximity, the distance 800-A, 800-B and 800-C between the threesectors (Sector 1, Sector 2, and Sector 3) on the radio tower 110-A isso negligible, the accuracy is reduced to predicting the wirelessdevice's 104 location with one concentric sphere around the radio tower110-A, with a radius equaling the distance 800-A, 800-8, or 800-C fromany site as calculated above. Relative direction can be computed usingthe sector (Sector 1, Sector 2, or Sector 3) with the strongest receivepower from the wireless device 104 as the likely direction to thewireless device 104 (assuming highly directive antennas are being used).

The problem with these methods is that they do not disclose a means forformatting and structuring the decoded data from a plurality of wirelessdevices 104 into a database or other means of collaboration of data.This database could create a universal standard that could be accessedby other applications such as navigation apparatuses; wireless networks100 for network tuning purposes; or many other applications.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The primary object of the invention is to provide a process and machinefor transferring acquired geographical data, user information, date/timeinformation and/or user controlled settings information for a pluralityof wireless devices 104 to a database providing it as a resource forother software applications.

Another object of the invention is to provide a user location databasemanager (ULDM) 904 (FIG. 9) comprising a machine and process fordecoding and converting acquired geographical data, user information,date/time information and/or user controlled settings information into auniversal standard which is a practical and usable format such as, forexample, longitude/latitude for applications in other hardware and/orsoftware.

A further object of the invention is to provide a user location database(ULD) 900 (FIG. 9) comprising a means for storing geographical data,user information, date/time information, other defined data, and/or usercontrolled settings information for a plurality of wireless devices 104.

Yet another object of the invention is to provide a user locationdatabase coordinator (ULDC) 908 (FIG. 9) comprising a means forinterfacing a plurality of user location databases (ULD) 900 andallowing remote query of data of a herein created network of ULD's 1512(FIG. 15) from individual or a plurality of attached ULD's 1512. Afurther object of the ULDC 908 is to provide a feature for redundancyand input/output capable ports for expansion.

Yet another object of the invention is to provide a user locationdatabase coordinator network (ULDCN) 1600 (FIG. 16) comprising a meansfor querying a plurality of user ULD's 1512 and/or ULD's 1512 attachedto any ULDC 908.

Still yet another object of the invention is to provide a means foraccess by a plurality of “e-mobility” services 144 that could takeadvantage of the ULD 900.

Another object of the invention is to provide a means for interfacingdirectly form a BSS manager 126 to the user location database manager(ULDM) 904 for maintenance and direct access of said features.

Still yet another object of the invention is to provide a hierarchyprocess for query (HPQ) comprising a means for a user location databasecoordinator network (ULDCN) 1600 to query a plurality of user locationdatabases coordinators (ULDC) 908 in a programmable order so as tooptimize the query results.

Another object of the invention is to provide a hierarchy of userlocation methods (HULM) comprising a means for the user locationdatabase manager(s) to select the most accurate location method, from aprogrammable plurality of location methods, for locating the pluralityof wireless devices 104 according to variable conditions that existwithin the wireless network or location information from the wirelessdevice 104 including GPS and triangulation.

Another object of the invention is to provide a user control settingcomprising a means for a privacy flag in the ULD 900 database entry fora device to be activated/deactivated/semi-active for privacy reasons sothat the user's location is not monitored or monitored anonymously.

A further object of the invention is to provide for a machine/processULDC 908 for transferring acquired geographical data, user information,date/time information and/or user controlled settings information for aplurality of wireless devices 104 that explicitly contain GPS equipment,to a database providing it as a resource for other applications.

Still yet another object of the invention is to provide the ULD 900 asdatabase resource for:

-   -   Applications such as “911” emergency crew, police, etc., to        track/find wireless devices though ULDC 908 queries.    -   Applications such as wireless network tuning; in order to save        engineers some of the time and expense required to gather field        data, which may be used.    -   Applications such as navigational mapping programs and/or        apparatus that may be used, for example, to aid in mapping        vehicle travel routes in order to avoid traffic jams and find        faster moving routes of travel.    -   Applications such as a vehicle traffic monitoring system, which        for example, could be used by emergency vehicles, traffic        engineers to monitor traffic, or by employers to monitor and        track employee travels, locations and estimated times of        arrival.    -   Applications such as a resource for a telephone recording law        database for recording of telephone conversations at or near the        switch 130, or on the wireless device 104, to as to comply with        recording laws of the city, county, state or country.    -   Applications such as a geographic advertising system (GAS)        resource for targeting advertising (coupons, sales, special        offers, etc.) offers (solicitations) to users of wireless        devices 102 based on the wireless device's 104 location or for        users of wireless devices 102 to query advertising offers,        prices for goods and services based on the location of the        wireless device 104.

Other objects and advantages of the present invention will becomeapparent from the following descriptions, taken in connection with theaccompanying drawings, wherein, by way of illustration and example, anembodiment of the present invention is disclosed.

A machine for transferring acquired data, user information, date/timeinformation and/or user controlled settings information for a pluralityof wireless devices 104 to a database providing it as a resource forother software applications that comprise of:

-   -   ULDM 904 having a means for decoding and converting the acquired        geographical data, user information, date/time information        and/or user controlled settings information into a usable format    -   ULD 900 comprising a means for storing the geographical data,        user information, date/time information and/or user controlled        settings information for the plurality of wireless devices    -   ULDC 908 comprising a means for interfacing a plurality of ULD's        1512 and allowing remote query of ULD 900 database entries.

A process for transferring the acquired geographical data, userinformation, date/time information and/or user controlled settingsinformation for the plurality of wireless devices 104 to the dynamicdatabase providing it as said resource for other applications comprisingthe steps of decoding and converting the acquired geographical data,user information, date/time information, other defined data, and/or usercontrolled settings information into a usable format for the ULDM 904.Additionally storing the decoded and converted geographical data, userinformation, date/time information, other defined data, and/or usercontrolled settings information for the plurality of wireless devices104 into the ULD 900. Further, interfacing the plurality of ULD's 1512into the ULDC 908 and any ULDC 908 network.

The drawings constitute a part of this specification and includeexemplary embodiments to the invention, which may be embodied in variousforms. It is to be understood that in some instances various aspects ofthe invention may be shown exaggerated or enlarged to facilitate anunderstanding of the invention.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 TYPICAL SECOND GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE (PRIORART)

FIG. 2 TYPICAL THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECHTURE (PRIORART)

FIG. 3 TYPICAL THREE SECTOR RADIO TOWER CONFIGURATION (PRIOR ART)

FIG. 4 TYPICAL FOOTPRINT CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH SECTOR (SIDE VIEW)(PRIOR ART)

FIG. 5 TYPICAL FOOTPRINT CHARACTERISTICS OF EACH SECTOR (TOP VIEW)(PRIOR ART)

FIG. 6 THREE TOWER LOCATION METHOD (PRIOR ART)

FIG. 7 TWO TOWER LOCATION METHOD (PRIOR ART)

FIG. 8 SINGLE TOWER LOCATION METHOD (PRIOR ART)

FIG. 9 TYPICAL SECOND GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE WITHEMBODIMENTS

FIG.10 TYPICAL THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE WITHEMBODIMENTS

FIG. 11 FLOWCHART OF TRACKING WIRELESS DEVICE'S LOCATION

FIG. 12 INTERWORKING BETWEEN BSC, SWITCH, AND ULDM

FIG. 13 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR (MARKET LEVEL QUEERY)

FIG. 14 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR FLOWCHART

FIG. 15 GENERIC USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR COMPONENTS

FIG. 16 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR (MARKET BASED SYSTEM)

FIG. 17 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR NETWORK (REGION BASED SYSTEM)

FIG. 18 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR NETWORK (DIRECT SYSTEM)

FIG. 19 ULDC EXTERNAL QUERY CONNECTIVITY

FIG. 20 HIERARCHY OF LOCATION METHODS

FIG. 21 VALIDATION OF LOCATION METHODS

FIG. 22 E-MOBILITY USER LOCATION DATABASE QUERIES

FIG. 23 RF REMOTE LINK COMPONENTS

FIG. 24 RF REMOTE LINK TO REMOTE MOBILE DEVICE

FIG. 25 RF REMOTE LINK NETWORK

FIG. 26 REMOTE MOBILE DEVICE CONTROL HARDWARE

FIG. 27 COMPONENTS UTILIZED BY ULDM

FIG. 28 INTER WORKING SYSTEM DIAGRAM

FIG. 29 PHYSICAL REALIZATION OF PREFFERED EMBODIMENTS

FIG. 30 STANDARDIZATION/CONVERSION SOFTWARE

FIG. 31 BSC ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE

FIG. 32 USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE

FIG. 33 DEVICE LOCATION SOFTWARE

FIG. 34 TRAGETING DEVICES TO TRACK

FIG. 35A PRIMARY ANALYTIC SOFTWARE

FIG. 35B PRIMARY ANALYTIC SOFTWARE (CONTINUED)

FIG. 35C PRIMARY ANALYTIC SOFTWARE (CONTINUED)

FIG. 36 MONITORING SOFTWARE FLOWCHART

FIG. 37 CASE FILE GENERATION

FIG. 38A FAULT DIAGNOSIS/CORRECTION SOFTWARE

FIG. 38B FAULT DIAGNOSIS/CORRECTION SOFTWARE (CONTINUED)

FIG. 38-C FAULT DIAGNOSIS/CORRECTION SOFTWARE (CONTINUED)

FIG. 39 CORRELATED MAPPING SOFTWARE FLOWCHART

FIG. 40 DISPLAY SOFTWARE FLOWCHART

FIG. 41 FINAL DISPLAY OUTPUT

FIG. 42 PRO-ACTIVE NETWORK TUNING SOFTWARE

FIG. 43 ACTIVE WIRELESS UNIT DENSITY GEOGRAPHIC ZONING

FIG. 44 ACTIVE WIRELESS UNIT DENSITY

FIG. 45 TERRAIN INTEFERENCE NON-RADIAL ZONING

FIG. 46 TERRAIN INTEFERENCE RADIAL DIVIDED ZONING

FIG. 47 TERRAIN INTEFERENCE RADIAL DIVIDED BORDER ZONES

FIG. 48 THERMAL PROCESS FLOWCHART

FIG. 49 ACTIVE WIRELESS UNIT DENSITY PROCESS

FIG. 50 TERRAIN TUNING PROCESS

FIG. 51 NETWORK EQUIPMENT TUNING FLOWCHART

FIG. 52 NTS PRO-ACTIVE SYSTEM MENU

FIG. 53 USER LOGS INTO SYSTEM

FIG. 54 ENTRY OF DESIRED TELEPHONE NUMBER

FIG. 55 USER CHOICES MENU

FIG. 56 USER SELECTS BUILDINGS TO DISPLAY

FIG. 57 ADDING) DELEATING AND EDITING PHONEBOOK ENTRIES

FIG. 58 USER SELECTION ON BUILDINGS TO DISPLAY

FIG. 59 “BUILDING MEMORY” USER'S CHOICE MENU

FIG. 60 “BUILDING MEMORY” CONTINUED

FIG. 61 CATEGORIZING BUILDING MEMORY

FIG. 62 “LISTING” ADDED TO “BUILDING MEMORY”

FIG. 63 “NAME” ADDED TO “BUILDING MEMORY”

FIG. 64 “CATEGORY” ADDED TO “BUILDING MEMORY”

FIG. 65 “ADDRESS” ADDED TO “BUILDING MEMORY”

FIG. 66 “PHONE NUMBER” ADDED TO “BUILDING MEMORY”

FIG. 67 DISPLAY OF CALL HISTORY

FIG. 68 PRINT CALL HISTORY

FIG. 69 ADD CALL/LOCATION HISTORY TO PHONE BILL

FIG. 70 FLOWCHART OF THE DIRECTIONAL ASSISTANCE NETWORK (DAN) QUERYPROCESS

FIG. 71 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE DIRECTIONS BY A PHONENUMBER

FIG. 72 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE DIRECTIONS BY A NAME

FIG. 73 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE DIRECTIONS BY ACATEGORY

FIG. 74 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE DIRECTIONS BY ANADDRESS

FIG. 75 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE DIRECTIONS BY FASTESTTRAVEL TIME

FIG. 76 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE DIRECTIONS BYSHORTEST DISTANCE

FIG. 77 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO BE CONNECTED TO A SELECTEDLISTING

FIG. 78 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO LOCATE A WCD

FIG. 79 FLOWCHART OF DAN USER INTERFACE TO RECEIVE A MAP AND TRAVELPLANS

FIG. 80 TRAFFIC MONITORING AND ROUTING SOFTWARE PROCESS FLOWCHART

FIG. 81 DIRECTIONAL ASSISTANCE NETWORK STRUCTURE

FIG. 82 PRIMARY EMBODIMENT'S LOCATION ON A TYPICAL 2/3G CELLULAR NETWORK

FIG. 83 PRIMARY EMBODIEMENT'S ALTERNATE LOCATION ON A TYPICAL 2/3GCELLULAR NETWORK

FIG. 84 PRIMARY EMBODIMENT'S ALTERNATE LOCATION #2 ON A TYPICAL 2/3GCELLULAR NETWORK

FIG. 85 DAN LINKING SOFTWARE

FIG. 86 TRAFFIC TIME CALCULATION PERFORMANCE BASED ON VARIABLE A

FIG. 87 TRAFFIC TIME CALCULATION PERFORMANCE BASED ON VARIABLE TRAFFICDENSITY RATIO

MASTER LIST OF COMPONENTS

-   100 SECOND GENERATION WIRELESS DEVICE NETWORK-   102 WIRELESS DEVICE USER-   104 WIRELESS DEVICE-   104-A WIRELESS DEVICE-   104-B WIRELESS DEVICE-   104-C WIRELESS DEVICE-   104-D WIRELESS DEVICE-   106 WIRELESS DEVICE RF SIGNAL-   108 RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER NETWORK-   110-A RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER-   110-B RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER.-   110-C RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER-   112 GPS SATELLITE NETWORK SIGNAL-   114 GPS SATELLITE NETWORK-   116 COMMUNICATION LINKS (T1, T3, MICROWAVE LINK, ETC.)-   118-A BASE STATION CONTROLLER (BSC) WITH VOCORDING, CIS & BACKHUAL    1/F-   118-B BASE STATION CONTROLLER (BSC) WITH VOCORDING AND ATMIC-   120 VOCORDING-   122 CDMA INTERCONNECTION SUBSYSTEM (CIS)-   124 BACKHUAL 1/F-   126 BSS MANAGER-   128 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   130 SWITCH (MTX OR OTHER)-   132 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   134 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   136 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   138 PUBLICLY SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK (PSTN)-   140 CONNECTION FROM PSTN TO LAND LINES-   142 LAND LINES-   144 E-MOBILITY SERVICES-   148 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   150 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   152 SECOND GENERATION SWITCHING STATION-   154 INTERWORKING FUNCTION-   156 PACKET DATA NETWORK-   200 THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS DEVICE NETWORK-   202 PACKET DATA SERVICE NODE-   204 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   210 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTION-   212 ATMIC-   300 BASE STATION TRANCEVER SUBSYSTEM (BTS)-   302 GPS RECEIVER-   304 MICROWAVE LINK-   306-A SECTOR ONE PRIMARY RECEIVER ANTENNA-   306-B SECTOR ONE TRANSMIT ANTENNA-   306-C SECTOR ONE DIVERSITY RECEIVER ANTENNA-   308-A SECTOR TWO PRIMARY RECEIVER ANTENNA-   308-B SECTOR TWO TRANSMIT ANTENNA-   308-C SECTOR TWO DIVERSITY RECEIVER ANTENNA-   310-A SECTOR THREE PRIMARY RECEIVER ANTENNA-   310-B SECTOR THREE TRANSMIT ANTENNA-   310-C SECTOR THREE DIVERSITY RECEIVER ANTENNA-   312 RADIO TOWER POLE-   314 ANTENNA LEADS TO BTS-   400 MAIN LOBE AND PRIMARY DIRECTIVITY-   402-A SIDE LOBE-   402-B SIDE LOBE-   404 REAR LOBE-   600-A DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER 110-A, TO    WIRELESS DEVICE 104-   600-B DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER 110-B, TO    WIRELESS DEVICE 104-   600-C DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER 110-C TO    WIRELESS DEVICE 104-   700-A DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER 110-A, TO    WIRELESS DEVICE 104-   700-B DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER 110-B, TO    WIRELESS DEVICE 104-   800-A DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER AND BTS WITH GPS RECEIVER 110-A,    SECTOR ONE, TO WIRELESS DEVICE 104-   800-B DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER 110-A, SECTOR TWO TO WIRELESS DEVICE    104-   800-C DISTANCE FROM RADIO TOWER 110-A, SECTOR THREE TO WIRELESS    DEVICE 104-   900 USER LOCATION DATABASE-   902 DATABASE LOGIC CENTER-   904 USER LOCATION DATABASE MANAGER-   906 STANDARDIZATION CONVERSION (SOFTWARE/HARDWARE)-   908 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR (ULDC)-   910-A COMMUNICATIONS LINKS (T1, T3, DEDICATED LINES, MICROWAVE LINK,    ETC.)-   910-B COMMUNICATIONS LINK (T1, T3, DEDICATED LINES, MICROWAVE LINK,    ETC.)-   910-C COMMUNICATIONS LINK (T1, T3, DEDICATED LINES, MICROWAVE LINK,    ETC.)-   910-D COMMUNICATIONS LINK (T1, T3, DEDICATED LINES, MICROWAVE LINK,    ETC.)-   912 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   922 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   924 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   926 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   928 INTERSYSTEM LOGICAL CONNECTIONS-   1200 TIMING (TOA, RTD, ETC.)-   1210 SIGNAL STRENGTH MEASURES-   1220 CALL PROCESS INFORMATION-   1230 RADIO TOWER AND BTS LATITUDE/LONGITUDE-   1240 RADIO TOWER ALTITUDE-   1250 RADIO TOWER DOWNTILT-   1260 REGION TYPE OF TOWER (RURAL, URBAN, ETC.)-   1270 CALL PROCESS IDENTIFICATION NUMBER-   1280 HLR/VLR INFORMATION ON CALLER-   1290 AZIMUTH ON SECTORS AND RADIO TOWERS-   1300-A SECOND GENERA TIONWIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER-   1300-B SECOND GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER-   1302-A THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER-   1302-B THIRD GENERATION WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER-   1304 EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES APPLICATIONS-   1306 COMMUNICATIONS LINK {T1, T3, DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE,    MICROWAVE LINK, ETC.)-   1500-A COMMUNICAITONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3,    ETC.)-   1500-B COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC.)-   1500-C COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3,    ETC.)-   1500-D COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC.)-   1500-E COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3,    ETC.)-   1502 PLURALITY OF ULDC'S-   1506 UPLINK CONNECTION COMPONENT OF THE ULDC-   1508 SINGLE ULDC HIGHER ON HEIRARCHY-   1510 ULD ACCESS CONTROL UNIT OF THE ULDC-   1512 PLURALITY OF ULD'S-   1516 REMOTE ACCESS CONTROL UNIT OF THE ULDC-   1518-A RF REMOTE LINK-   1518-B RF REMOTE LINK-   1518-C RF REMOTE LINK-   1522 DATA LOGGING UNIT OF THE ULDC-   1524 ULDC CONTROL HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   1526 MAINTENANCE UNIT-   1528 MASTER ULDM AND LOCATION VERIFICATION PROCESS-   1530 MARKET OR GROUP ULD-   1532 MIRROR DATABASE-   1534 MULTIPLE DOWNLINK CONNECTIONS OF THE ULDC-   1536 ULDC ACCESS CONTROL UNIT OF THE ULD-   1538 UPLINK/DOWNLINK ATM REDUNDANT CONNECTION-   1540 PLURALITY OF REMOTE ACCESS TERMINALS-   1542 ULDC OR FUTURE EXPANSION REQUIRING ULDC INTERFACE-   1600 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR NETWORK (MARKET BASED    SYSTEM)-   1602 NATIONAL OR INTERNATIONAL ULDC-   1604 MARKET “A” ULDC-   1606 MARKET “B” ULDC-   1608 MARKET “C” ULDC-   1610 MARKET “D” ULDC-   1612 MARKET “F” ULDC-   1614 MARKET “G” ULDC-   1616 MARKET “H” ULDC-   1618 OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS LINK BETWEEN MARKET ULD'S-   1620 MARKET “E” ULDC-   1630-A COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-B COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-C COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-D COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-E COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-F COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-G COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1630-H COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1700 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR NETWORK (REGION BASED    SYSTEM)-   1702 DISTRICT “A” ULDC-   1704 DISTRICT “B” ULDC-   1706 REGION “A” ULDC-   1708 REGION “B” ULDC-   1710 REGION “C” ULDC-   1712 REGION “D” ULDC-   1714-A OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1,    T3, ETC)-   1714-B OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1,    T3, ETC)-   1714-C OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1,    T3, ETC)-   1714-D OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1,    T3, ETC)-   1716-A COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-B COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-C COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-D COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-E COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-F COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-G COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-H COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-I COMMUNICATIONS LINK(DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-J COMMUNICATIONS LINK(DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-K COMMUNICATIONS LINK(DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-L COMMUNICATIONS LINK(DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-M COMMUNICATIONS LINK(DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1716-N COMMUNICATIONS LINK(DEDICATED LINES, SATELLITE, T1, T3, ETC)-   1800 USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR NETWORK (DIRECT SYSTEM)-   1900 REMOTE WIRELESS DEVICE-   1902 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS LINK (RADIO FREQUENCY LINK, ETC.)-   1904 PLURALITY OF REMOTE WIRELESS DEVICES-   1906 POLICE-   1908 AUTHORIZED ACCOUNTS AND OTHERS-   1910-A COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC.-   1910-B COMMUNICATIONS LINK (DEDICATED LINES, SATELITE, T1, T3, ETC.)-   2300 OMNIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMIT/RECEIVE ANTENNA-   2302 ANTENNA LEADS-   2304 TRANSMIT UNIT-   2308 RECEIVE UNIT-   2310 MAINTENANCE UNIT-   2320 TRANSMIT CONTROL UNIT-   2330 RECEIVER CONTROL UNIT-   2340 ULDC INTERFACE CONTROL HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   2350 RF LINK MANAGEMENT HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   2360 POWER CONTROL UNIT-   2380 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE-   2410 PCMICA INTERFACE CARD-   2420 CONTROL HARDWARE-   2430 ANTENNA-   2440 DATA CABLE-   2450 TOP COMPUTER-   2460 ANTENNA LEADS-   2470 CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE-   1518-A RF REMOTE LINK-   1902 RF REMOTE LINK-   2500 RF REMOTE LINK NETWORK-   2510 DENSE URBAN AREA-   2520 URBAN AREA-   2530 SUB-URBAN AREA-   2605 TRANSMIT UNIT-   2608 RECEIVE UNIT-   2620 TRANSMIT CONTROL UNIT-   2630 RECEIVE CONTROL UNIT-   2640 RF INTERFACE CONTROL HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   2660 POWER CONTROL UNIT-   2800 NETWORK TUNING SYSTEM/PRIMARY EMBODIMENT-   2802 MONITORING SOFTWARE-   2804 BSC ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE-   2806 FAULT DIAGNOSIS/CORRECTION SOFTWARE-   2808 DEVICE LOCATION SOFTWARE-   2810 GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION DATABASE-   2812 CRISS-CROSS PHONEBOOK DATABASE WITH LAT/LONG CORRELATIONS-   2814 PRIMARY ANALYTIC SOFTWARE-   2816 INTERNAL CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT AND COMPUTER-   2818 INTERNAL MEMORY STORAGE-   2820 CASE FILES WITH LAT/LONG-   2822 SERVICING EFFECTING FACTORS WITH LAT/LONG CORRELATIONS-   2824 RADIO TOWER WITH LAT/LONG CORRELATIONS-   2826 USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE-   2828 CORRELATING MAPPING SOFTWARE-   2830 CORRELATING DATA FOR LAT/LONG INFORMATION-   2832 DISPLAY SOFTWARE/HARDWARE-   2834 E-MOBILE CONNECTION-   2836 DISPLAY SCREEN-   2838 LINK REQUIREMENTS FOR SCANNING MODE-   2840-A PASSIVE LINKS-   2840-B PASSIVE LINKS-   2842-A PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2842-B PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-A PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-B PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-C PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-D PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-E PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-F PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-G PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-H PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2844-I PASSIVE LINK AND/OR ACTIVE LINKS-   2846-A PASSIVE SCANNING MODE, ACTIVE LINKS-   2846-B PASSIVE SCANNING MODE, ACTIVE LINKS-   2846-C PASSIVE SCANNING MODE, ACTIVE LINKS-   2848 USER-   2900 MASTER SERVER-   2902 EXTERNAL ACCESS POINT-   2904 LOCAL ACCESS POINT-   2906 HIGHSPEED INTERNET GATEWAY-   2908 WORLD WIDE WEB-   2910 INDIVIDUAL COMPUTERS-   2912 CORPORATE EXTERNAL LAN (SECURE)-   2914 BACK-UP SYSTEM SERVER-   2916 DATA FLOW DIAGRAM-   2918-A DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-B DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-C DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-D DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-E DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-F DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-G DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2918-H DATA FLOW CONNECTIONS-   2920-A LAN CONNECTIONS-   2920-B LAN CONNECTIONS-   2920-C LAN CONNECTIONS-   3000 START (GENERIC COMMAND)-   3004 PROTOCOL DATABASE-   3012 RECEIVE DEVICE PROTOCOL LIST-   3110 COMMAND LIST-   3200 INTERNET-   3202 INTERNET-   3206 LOCAL SERVER/WORK STATION-   3216 USER DATABASE-   3224 SYSTEM LOG-   3700 LOCATION OF WIRELESS DEVICE BEING TRACKED-   3704 FORWARD RECEIVE POWER-   3706 FORWARD TRANSMIT POWER-   3708 EC/LO-   3710 NEIGHBOR LIST-   3712 MESSAGING-   3714 FER-   3716 OTHER ERROR CODES-   3718 OTHER USER DEFINED FACTORS-   3720 ERROR CODE-   3722 CASE FILE #-   3724 WIRELESS DEVICE ID #-   3726 OTHER USER DEFINED FACTORS-   3816 LOCAL ERROR DATABASE-   3828 TREND ANALYSIS DATA-   3878 STORED ERROR DATA-   3886 MESSAGE TABLE-   3888 CORRECTION TABLE-   3920 DATA LAYER-   3926 MASTER DATA LAYER-   3936 MASTER MAP LAYER-   3940 FILTERED MASTER DATA LAYER-   3942 FILTERED DATE LAYER-   3944 FILTERED MASTER MAPPING LAYER-   3946 FILTERED MAPPING LAYER-   3950 PRIMARY DISPLAY LAYER DATA FILE-   4002 PRIMARY DISPLAY LAYER-   4004 SECONDARY DISPLAY LAYER-   4100 RADIO TOWER LOCATIONS DISPLAY LAYER-   4110 WIRELESS DEVICE LOCATIONS DISPLAY LAYER-   4120 SERVICE AFFECTING FACTORS DISPLAY LAYER-   4130 ERROR CODES DISPLAY LAYER-   4140 CRISS-CROSS PHONEBOOK ENTRIES DISPLAY LAYER-   4150 AUXILIARY OBJECT LOCATIONS DISPLAY LAYER-   4160 GEOGRAPHIC/TOPOLOGICAL STREET MAP OVERLAY DISPLAY LAYER-   4170 FINAL DISPLAY OUTPUT-   5300 LOCATION TRACKING SYSTEM-   5304 USER NAME AND PASSWORD-   5306 INTERNAL STORAGE MEMORY-   5312 USER RECORDS-   5322 HELP MENU/SERVICE AGENT/OPERATOR-   5326 MERCHANT CREDIT CARD SERVICES ACCOUNT-   5400 MEMBERSHIP DATA-   5420 FAX ON DEMAND-   5422 POSTAL ADDRESS CONVERSION HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   5424 AUTOMATED ANSWERING HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   5426 VOICE TEXT READ-UP HARDWARE/SOFTWARE-   5502 USER CHOICE MENU-   8100 directional assistance network (DAN)-   8101 primary logic software-   8105 voice interface software-   8110 voice mapping software-   8115 device location software-   8120 routing software-   8125 traffic monitoring software-   8130 data interface software-   8135 external DAN query interface software-   8140 external connections to query device-   8145 PSTN phone location database-   8150 criss-cross lat/long geographic database-   8155 geographic database mapping software-   8160 standardization and conversion software/hardware-   8165 external network connection-   8170 computer system-   8202 wireless communication-   8205 wireless communication device-   8212 PSTN/PSTN location database communication interface-   8220 telephone-   8222 MTX/PSTN interface-   8227 MTX/BSC interface-   8232 BSC/BTS interface-   8237 MTX/user location database interface-   8242 MTX/e-mobility services interface-   8247 MTX/PDN interface-   8252 PON/internet gateway interface-   8255 internet gateway-   8257 internet gateway/internet interface-   8260 internet-   8262 a-mobility services/DAN interface-   8267 MTX/WCD location software interface-   8270 WCD location software-   8300 DAN linking software-   8310 DAN/internet interface-   8320 a-mobility services/DAN linking software interface-   8410 DAN/PSTN interface-   8515 interim linking software-   8517 interim linking software/packet routing software/hardware    interface-   8520 packet routing software/hardware-   8522 interim linking software/DAN data query software interface-   8525 DAN data query software

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

Detailed descriptions of the preferred embodiment are provided herein.It is to be understood, however, that the present invention may beembodied in various forms. Therefore, specific details disclosed hereinare not to be interpreted as limiting, but rather as a basis for theclaims and as a representative basis for teaching one skilled in the artto employ the present invention in virtually any appropriately detailedsystem, structure or manner.

Referring to FIG. 9, this invention of both a machine and processfocuses directly on the ability to use dynamic location basedinformation of a plurality of wireless devices 104 in the form oflatitude and longitude, store that data to a dynamic software databaseuser location database (ULD) 900, via the database logic center 902, andallow a means by which to share the software database ULD 900 with otherentities (either software or hardware). The hardware shown in FIG. 9(possibly logically integrated into existing hardware) consists of a ULD900, a database logic center (DLC) 902, a user location database manager(ULDM) 904, standardization conversion hardware/software 906, and a userlocation database coordinator (ULDC) 908.

These systems/machines and the software/processes defined within thisinvention add a unique and novel ability that in its entirety willbenefit both business and public as a whole. This benefit will befinancially profitable for businesses by allowing the creation of auniversal standard that software applications can be developed off of,greatly reducing individual project cost by using this invention asresource. Additionally, as many new wireless software programs areincreasingly using location based technology in the form of GPS, thisinvention would then increase the profitability of companies by usingthis technology for their software because it is based on existinginfrastructure and would not require a consumer, who possesses awireless device 104, to purchase any additional equipment. This wouldrequire less investment by a company using this invention, and increaseimmediate profit of any hardware/software/firmware applicationsdeveloped using this invention.

The fundamental machine is defined by the inclusion of the ULD 900, DLC902, ULDM 904, standardization conversion hardware/software 906, andULDC, 908. Basic functions as expanded on in subsequent sections of thisinvention are as follows:

-   -   ULD 900: Software database for data that includes user entries        consisting of a user identifier, latitude and longitude, and        other aspects as described in subsequent sections.    -   DLC 902 converts data into a storable format for the ULD 900    -   ULDM 904: Responsible for reading/writing/appending user entries        in the ULD 900 and calculating the data that will be entered        into those entries by gathering information from the BSC 118-A        and the switch (MTX or other) 130.    -   Standardization Conversion Hardware/Software 906 converts data        into a standardized format for the ULDC 908.    -   ULDC 908: Allows remote access of a singular or plurality of        ULD's 1512 by a remote database query.

The machine and process are compatible with existing 2nd generationwireless device network 100 and future 3rd generation wireless devicenetworks 200. Current wireless networks such as in FIG. 1 are commonlyreferred to as 2G or second-generation networks 100.

Still referring to FIG. 9, the components that have been added to thearchitecture of the second-generation wireless network 100 comprise ofthe primary embodiments of the machine and process. The ULDM 904 is usedfor acquiring geographic location data from the BSC 118-A (callprocessing information/TDOA/RSSI and other data such as predeterminedlocation) and user identifying information (phone number) from theswitch (MTX or other) 130.

It then creates a database entry using the user information {phonenumber), date/time information and user controlled settings of aplurality of wireless devices 104 and puts it into the ULD 900 in itssoftware database entry format via the DLC 902. The ULD 900 is asoftware database resource, containing user entries created by the ULDM904, for other software/hardware applications such as the showna-Mobility services 144. The ULDC 908 connects to the switch {MTX orother) 130 and allows remote access to the ULD 900. Logical and physicalconnections between these physical and logical bodies are illustrated asintersystem logical connections 922, 148, 924, 926, 928 and the wiredlink {T1, or other) 910-A between the switch {MTX or other) 130 and theULDC 908.

Still referring to FIG. 9, also within the scope of this invention, isthe ability for location to be determined at the wireless device 104.This could be accomplished if the device contained a GPS unit itself, ora other means of determining location and could acquire its geographiclocation {latitude/longitude/altitude/time). In such a case, informationwould be transmitted back to the switch {MTX or other) 130 by the phoneand reported to the ULDM 904. The location would then be transmitteddirectly into the DLC 902 (of the ULD 900), and stored in the ULD 900.In this case, the wireless device 104 is responsible for thedetermination of its location. Regardless of where the location at thewireless device 104 is computed, this invention's integrity remains thesame. The ability to compute the location at the wireless device 104, orwithin the wireless device network 100 or 200 is covered by numerousprevious patents.

Still referring to FIG. 9, the data can be sent/received by thee-mobility services 144 or directly to the BSC 206 as data. Locationinformation in this case would be sent continuously or limited byfeatures on the wireless device 104. Implementation of this method withwireless device 104 having GPS equipment, requires the wireless device104 to be in relative sight to the sky. The GPS unit would requireintegration and other procedures to integrate with the wireless device104. Other methods (as taught in the prior art) of determining thelocation of the wireless device 104 at the wireless device 104 may notrequire the wireless device 104 to be in plain sight or relative to thesky. Regardless, the final results once the longitude/latitude data issent from the wireless device 104 is the same if the data is calculatedat the wireless device 104, or calculated at the ULDM 904.

Still referring to FIG. 9, to utilize any calculations of locations atthe wireless device 104, that data will need to be transmitted to theradio towers and BTS 110-A, 110-B, and 110-C, along with voice. Varioussystems exists to accommodate this including time divided multipleaccess (TOMA), code divided multiple access (CDMA) and others.

Beyond the 2G wireless device networks 100 (FIG. 1) exists an emergingtechnology called 3G (FIG. 2), or third generation (networks) 200. Thesewireless networks offer greater features and bandwidth to wirelessdevices 104 on the network. Integration as shown in FIG. 2 is identicalto FIG. 1, or to the 2G wireless device network 100.

Additional Embodiments

Additionally embodiments include a means for a plurality of “e-mobility”services 144 to access the ULD 900 through software (possibly SQL orother similar database query methods). Further included is a means forinterfacing directly from the BSS manager 126 to the ULDM 904 formaintenance and direct access of said features.

Further embodiments include adding to the ULDC 908 a means forredundancy in case of hardware/software failure, using optionalinput/output capable ports. Additionally, creating a user locationdatabase coordinator network (ULDCN) (FIG. 16) 1600, comprising a meansfor querying a plurality of user location database coordinators (ULDC's)1502 and their respective ULD's 1512.

A further additional embodiment details a process for querying aplurality of ULDC's 1502 in a programmable order so as to optimize thequery results.

A method also claimed is the hierarchy of user location methods (HULM)that comprises a means for the ULDM 904 to select the most accuratelocation method from a plurality of location methods, for locating theplurality of wireless devices 104 according to variable conditions whichexist within the wireless device network 100. To ensure consumerprivacy, a user control setting comprising a means for a “full” privacyflag (meaning an electronic register indicating the user does not wanttheir phones location information tracked) to be set by a wirelessdevice user 102, alerts the ULDM 904 if it can record latitude andlongitude location data to the ULD 900 for that given wireless deviceuser 102. An “anonymous” privacy flag allows the location of a wirelessdevice 104 to be monitored on a limited basis, by not reporting theidentification information of the wireless device 104.

An additional embodiment is the addition of a RF remote link 1518 andremote mobile device 1900, which can be added to the ULDC 908 in orderto allow queries of the ULDC 908 from remote locations. Although theULDC 908 can be queried by the wireless device 104, the use of the RFremote link 1518 and remote mobile device 1900 allow queries to beperformed on a broader RF band than would be found on the wirelessdevice 104. This broader RF band allows for more data to be transferredat a greater speed than is possible by a typical wireless device 104.

Alternative Embodiments

Alternate embodiments to the invention include the ability for thehierarchy process for query (HPQ) to be programmed by a designatedentity, person, or group in such a way as deemed appropriate by thatparty to ensure a desired search procedure. Additionally the hierarchyof user location method's used by the ULDM 904 could be modified,appended, reprioritized or otherwise changed to use a plurality oflocation methods as programmed by a person, group or other entity toobtain any desired level of detail regarding the accuracy of thelatitude and longitude calculations.

Other alternatives include the ability for the privacy flag to be lockedin the inactive position by the owner of the wireless device 104, byremote access, if it is to be used for example, by an employee, a child,a thief or if the wireless device 104 is lost. Having the ability forthe privacy flag to be automatically turned in the off position when theuser of the wireless device 104 dials emergency services such as forexample “911” is also an alternative embodiment. Additionally, theability for the privacy flag to be turned off by the service provider inthe case of, for example, court ordered surveillance. Alternative waysto access the privacy flag are having it be controlled and/orimplemented from the wireless device 104 or the BSS manager 126.

A further alternative embodiment is transferring acquired geographicaldata, user information, date/time information, other defined data,and/or user controlled settings information for a plurality of wirelessdevices 104 containing GPS equipment, or other location means, to theULDM 904 (from the wireless device itself) and then to the ULD 900. Thisalso includes the approach of having the means for the location of thewireless device 104 to be computed at the wireless device 104 and thentransmitted to the radio tower and BTS 110-A, to the BSC 118-A or 118-B,and then into the ULDM 904 and finally to the ULD 900.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS WITH EMBODIMENTS

Referring to FIG. 9, is a typical second-generation (2G) wireless devicenetwork 100 architecture similar to that found in FIG. 1. However, inFIG. 9, some of the embodiments of this invention, which include a ULDM904 a ULD 900 combined with the database logic center (DLC) 902, astandardization conversion software/hardware apparatus 906, and a ULDC908 have been added. When the wireless device user 102 sends voice ordata through the wireless device 104, the voice and data are sent via aradio frequency signal 106 to the radio tower network 108. The RF signal106 from the wireless device 104 is then received by the radio tower andBTS (with GPS receiver network 108). For illustration purposes, theradio towers and BTS 110-A, 110-B, and 110-C receive the RF signal 106.The user's voice and data information, along with other information(described in greater detail in FIG. 12) is then sent through adedicated line (T1, T3, microwave or other dedicated line) 910, to thebase station controller (BSC) 118-A. Information, which has beengathered from the radio tower and BTS with GPS receiver network 108, isthen dispensed from the BSC 118-A to the switch (MTX or other) 130 andthe ULDM 904.

The ULDM 904 then decodes the information that is gathered from the basestation controller (SSC) 118-A and the switch (MTX or other) 130. Itcomputes the location of a wireless device 104 in accordance withanother embodiment of this invention, the hierarchy of user locationmethods (HULM). The hierarchy of user location methods is a series ofchangeable and programmable algorithms, which incorporates theappropriate location methods as taught in the prior art. The appropriatemethod for determining the location of the wireless device 104 wouldconsist of many factors including rural or urban locations of radiotowers and other BTS information. Many other factors are covered underthe prior art.

The ULDM 904 then communicates with the DLC 902 through an intersystemlogical connection 150. The DLC 902 then stores the decoded data in theULD 900 in the form of longitude and latitude information, date and timeinformation, user identification information, user selected settings andother factors (as illustrated in FIG. 12). The switch (MTX or other) 130is simply the place where the ULDC 908 communicates data. The ULDM 904converts and sends the query via the intersystem logical connection 924,to the ULD 900 through the DLC 902. The ULD 900 then uses its DLC 902 toconvert query into internally recognized code and then retrieves it fromthe entry from the ULD 900. The results are passed back to the DLC 902,which converts the entry back into a format used by the ULDM 904. Theentry is passed back through the switch, (MTX or other) 130, to the ULDC908. This decoded data can also be sent through an intersystem logicalconnection 922 toe-mobility services 144 where the decoded data can beaccessed and used by a plurality of entities and applications.

Still referring to FIG. 9, these e-mobility services 144 can be accessedby other applications within a single service provider'ssecond-generation wireless device network 100. This networking of ULD's1512 between service providers and other entities is accomplishedthrough the use of two additional embodiments of this invention, astandardization conversion software/hardware 906 and a ULDC 908. Thewireless device 104 can interface with a plurality of applications thatare accessed through e-mobility services 144. The wireless device 104can also query the ULD's 1512 and ULDC's 1502 and use this data forapplications within the wireless device 104 or other equipment attachedto the wireless device 104. These e-mobility service(s) 144, ULD's 1512and ULDC's 1502 can also be interfaced via the Internet and the publiclyswitched telephone network (PSTN) 138.

The standardization conversion software/hardware 906 is known in theprior arts, however its use in this application is considered to be apoint of novelty. The purpose of this device is to facilitate astandardization of the software and hardware transmissions from theservice providers second generation wireless device network 100, todevice is comprising software and hardware outside of the secondgeneration wireless device network 100. However the standardizationconversion software/hardware 906, may not be needed within the secondgeneration wireless device network 100 if it is already operating with ahardware and software system which is compatible with the interfacing ofhardware and software outside of the second generation wireless devicenetwork 100.

In an alternative embodiment the standardization conversionsoftware/hardware 906 is comprised within, or as a peripheral of thedevice external to the second generation wireless device network 100such as the ULDC 908.

As previously stated the ULDC 908, which is referred to in FIG. 9,enables the networking of a plurality of ULD 900 which can be accessedthrough e-mobility services 144 so as to provide a resource, as anembodiment of this invention, for locating individual wireless devices104 for such applications as (for example) emergency medical serviceslocating a loss or injured wireless device user 102, or to assist awireless device user 102 to locate a loss or stolen wireless device 104.The ULDC 908, can also be used, in an alternative embodiment of thisinvention, as a resource to view and monitor the location of a pluralityof wireless devices 104 at the same time, which would be useful in suchapplications such as (for example) vehicle traffic monitoring so as toenable vehicle trip route planning for emergency medical servicevehicles trying to find the fastest route of travel to a particularemergency by avoiding congested traffic areas, or for vehicle trip routeplanning by individual drivers.

Yet another alternative embodiment of the user ULDC 908 is to provide aresource for monitoring the location of a plurality of selected wirelessdevices 104 so as to be useful in such applications (for example) asmonitoring the location of wireless devices 104 operated by police 1906,so as to enable faster response time by the police 1906 in an emergencysituation, or location of wireless devices 104 operated by taxi servicesor delivery services in order to improve efficiency, or for businessesto monitor the location of employs.

Now referring to FIG. 10, the same embodiments of this invention, asillustrated in FIG. 9, are illustrated here in the third-generationwireless device network architecture 200. These embodiments operate thesame as in FIG. 9.

For a third generation wireless device network 200, the differencesinvolved are minor. Primary operation of the embodiment does not change.However, additional embodiments do exist. The ability to send data athigher rates and to allow faster bi-directional communication betweenthe wireless device 104 and the wireless device network 200 are key.These factors allow the realization of real-time applications to be runfrom the wireless device 104 that could access various E-mobilityservices 144 and consequently the ULD 900.

Now referring to FIG. 11, is a flowchart of tracking wireless device's104 location. The items of this flowchart, which are numbered from 1100through 1196, are intended to demonstrate the current state-of-the-artregarding the processing of a call transmission from a wireless device104 and are therefore prior art. The items of this flowchart, which arenumbered 1100 through 1196, are unique to this convention and should beconsidered points of novelty. The call process begins 1100, when theuser originates a call 1105, and the base-station transceiver subsystem(BTS) 300 receives the call 1105. Information is then sent from the basestation transceivers subsystem to the base station controller (BSC)1110, at which point the base station controller 206 establishesresources for the call 1120. The base station controller 206 checks theswitch (MTX or other) 130 database for user information 1125. The switch{MTX or other) 130 authenticates user information and delivers it to theBSC 1130. From this point the BSC 206 establishes the call and routesthe call to its destination 1135, through the switch (MTX or other) 130and then to the publicly switched telephone network 138 or directly toother wireless devices 104 on the wireless network 1135. The callproceeds 1140, until the call is terminated 1145. The BSC 206 thenacknowledges the end of the call and tears down the resources 1150 atwhich point the call process ends1155.

Still referring to FIG. 11, the location process runs in parallel withthe call and begins when the switch (MTX or other) 130 authenticatesuser information and delivers the call to the BSC 1130. It is at thispoint that the switch (MTX or other) 130 passes the call processidentification number 1165 to the ULDM 904. The ULDM 904, negotiateswith the ULD 900 and sets up the entry 1160. It is at this point whenthe ULDM 904, checks to see if the user has activated the full privacyflag 1170. The full privacy flag 1170, is an embodiment of thisinvention. The privacy flag 1170, is intended to allow the user tochoose whether or not his/her location can be monitored by the ULDM 904.If the user has chosen to turn his full privacy flag 1170, on the ULDM904, then logs user inactive 1194 and the ULDM 904, stops tracking 1196.If the user has not turned their full privacy flag 1170 on, the BSCretrieves data on the call 1175. This also applies to when a user mayopt to have an ‘Anonymous Privacy Flag’. In this case, the user'slocation can only be accessed by external applications as part of ananonymous location query. In such case, the location of a said usercould not be associated with any user information. The differencebetween the “full privacy” flag and the “anonymous” flag is that thefull privacy flag will not let any external program access any data,personal or location information. While, on the other hand, theanonymous flag when set, will allow location-based information to bereleased, but not personal identifying information. These are bothelectronic registers that exist in the database entry of the user. Thequerying software checks them first, to discover the access rights tothe user's personal and location-based information.

The ULDM 904, then computes the location and the location time and dateinformation and other information 1180, which is acquired from the BSC206 and the switch (MTX for other) 130. It then sends the updated datainformation 1185 to the ULD 900, via the database logic center 1180. Asthe call proceeds, user information is updated 1185. If the call isstill active, the ULDM 904 computes the location and adds locationtime/date information 1180 and other desired information from the BSC206 and the switch (MTX or other) 130 and then enters this informationinto the ULD 900, via the database logic center 1180. At this point theuser information is updated again 1185. During this process thee-mobility service 144, applications have full access to the ULD 900,which can also be accessed directly by base station subsystem (BSS)1190. When the user information is updated 1185 and it is determinedthat the call is not active 1192, the ULDM 904, logs the ULD 900, entryas inactive 1194 and the ULDM 904, stops tracking the wireless device1196.

Referring to FIG. 12, this diagram illustrates in greater detail, theinter-working communication between the base-station controller (BSC)118-A or 118-8, the switch (MTX or other) 130 and the ULDM 904. The ULDM904 and the BSC 118-A or 118-B are connected by an intersystem logicalconnection 154. The ULDM 904 and the switch (MTX or other) 130 are alsoconnected by an inner system logical connection 152. The BSC 118-A or118-B and the switch (MTX or other) 130 are connected by an inner systemlogical connection 132. A wide variety of information is available to beshared between the ULDM 904, the BSC 118-A or 118-B, and the switch (MTXor other) 130 and can be used in the algorithms of the hierarchy of userlocation methods. Of these, the items that are most important indetermining location, include timing (time difference of arrival (TDOA)and round trip delay (RTD) 1200, signal strength measurements 1210, andcall processing information 1220, which are obtained from the BSC 118-Aor 118-B. In addition, the switch (MTX or other) 130 provides thefollowing information which is used to determine the location,including, radio tower and BTS latitude/longitude 1230, radio toweraltitude 1240, radio tower down tilt 1250, region type of tower (rural,urban, etc.) 1260, call process identification number 1270, HLRNLRinformation on caller 1280, and Azimuth on sectors and radio towers1290. However, if a location algorithm of the HULM requires anadditional item, they would be available to the ULDM 904, from theswitch (MTX or other) 130, and BSC 118A or 118-B. In an alternativeembodiment, location information from the wireless device 104 can alsobe obtained from the BSC, if the wireless device 104 is equipped withGPS or other location equipment.

Now referring to FIG. 13, this diagram illustrates a market level queryof the ULDC 908. This ULDC 908, is an embodiment of this invention andhas been previously illustrated in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10. The ULDC 908,facilitates the interfacing of a plurality of wireless service providers1300-A, 1300-B, 1302-A and 1302-B. In this example of a market levelquery, the ULDC 908, is queried by an emergency medical servicesapplication 1304, (for example) for the location of the individualwireless device 104. In this case a query is sent which is carriedthrough a communications link 1306, to the ULDC 908. The ULDC 908, thenevaluates the query using another embodiment of this invention, thehierarchy of process for query (HPQ). The hierarchy of process for query(HPQ) is a changeable and programmable method performing queries withina ULDC 908 or a user location database coordinator network 1600. Itsimply instructs the ULDC 908, on which devices to query for the resultsof the requested information (query).

Now referring to FIG. 14, is a flowchart, which illustrates a query forinformation pertaining to a single wireless device 104. As illustrated,the ULDC 908, waits for a query 1400. Then, a remote system (forexample, emergency medical services for a service provider) sends aquery to the ULDC 908 in the form of a phone number and includes itsassigned query ID number 1402. The ULDC 908, searches all of the ULD900, connected to it, in accordance to the parameters set by thehierarchy process for query (HPQ), for the user entry 1404. The entrythat was requested by the remote system would then be found in a ULD1406. The entry information is then sent back to the querying remotesystem, via the query ID number assigned at the beginning of the process1408. The remote system then acknowledges the received data from theULDC 1410.

Now referring to FIG. 15, is an illustration of components of the ULDC908 that has an ATM/direct connection 1500-A with a plurality of a ULDC908, in a hierarchy. 1500-B connects to the ULDC's 908, uplinkconnection 1506, to higher ULDC 908. The connection 1500-B should bededicated in the sense that interruptions are only when planned for andare expected. Suitable connections are T1, T3, microwave or othersimilar methods. The ULD 900, access control unit 1510, allows interfacewith a plurality of ULD ‘s 1512, having bi-directional connections1500-C to each. These connections 1500-C, are communications links (T1,T3, microwave or other dedicated lines) 1306. CRC checking and othererror checking methods are recommended when implementing the softwaredesign in the ULDC 908, control unit interface.

Still referring to FIG. 15, the remote access control unit (RACU) 1516,allows dial-up, permanent, or other connections/other external sourceaccess to the ULDC 908. The RACU 1516 has accommodations for a pluralityof connection options so-called dial-up or regular phone lineconnections and will require an internal modem to allow externalconnections of this type. The speed of the modem should not need toexceed to a 1400 kbs per port, although a faster modem could be used.Also accommodations for permanent connections should exist. Data lineconnection adapters for T1, or other digital sources should beintegrated. As specific on this integration prior art, simply theirpresence as a whole is claimed in this invention as unique. The RFmobile link 1518-A, could also be connected to the RACU 1516, via acommunications link 1500-D.

The data-logging unit 1522, is responsible for storing/logging queries.It records queries and results from the queries, as well as the user/IDnumber of the requesting entity to an internal software database. Thisdatabase should be permanent (but replaceable). A hard drive with thestorage capacity of 40 GB should suffice and if it reaches its storagethreshold data entries are erased starting ((starting with the oldestfirst). This storage capacity should allow for up to 1-year worth ofentries (if not more) to be reported before old entries are erased.

Still referring to FIG. 15, other components comprised with the ULDC908, include; ULDC 908 control hardware/software 1524, a maintenanceunit 1526, a master ULDM 904 and location verification process 1528, amarket or group ULD 1530, and a mirror database 1532. The mirrordatabase 1532, would mirror connected ULD's 1512, for faster access toinformation.

Still referring to FIG. 15, in an alternative embodiment, the ULDC 908,may comprise a DLC 902, e-mobility services 144 and standardizationconversion hardware/software 906. This standardization conversionhardware/software 906 would enable the ULDC 908 to be more compatiblewith hardware/software which is external (for example, service provider,user applications, etc.) to the ULDC 908. Adding e-mobility services 144to the ULDC 908 would add efficiency to the query process when the ULDC908 is asked to query a plurality of locations of wireless devices 104,from a plurality of service providers comprising a plurality of ULD's1512.

FIG. 16 shows an illustration of an alternative architecture of a ULDCN1600. This alternative architecture illustrates the operation of amarket-based system. In this architecture, a remote query, (for example)may be sent by an application comprised within the service providersnetwork, to the service provider's e-mobility services 144, for thelocation of a wireless device 104. If it is determined, by the search ofthe service providers ULD 900, that the wireless device 104, is notoperating within the service providers wireless device network 100, thequery would be forwarded from the market level ULDC 908, via a dedicatedcommunications link 910-A, and then to a national/international userlocation database coordinator 1602, via a dedicated line 1630-A. Thisnational/international ULDC 1602, will then query other market levelULDC's 1604, 1606, 1608, 1610, 1612, 1614, 1616, in the processspecified by the hierarchy process for query (HPQ), for the location ofthe specified wireless device 104, which may be roaming outside of itshome wireless network 100. This architecture offers the advantage ofeasily accessible viewing of market level ULDC's 1502, on the marketlevel and also on a national/international level 1602.

Still referring to FIG. 16, another notable embodiment which isillustrated in this architecture is the optional communications link1618, between the various market level ULDC 1604, 1606, 1608, 1610,1620, 1612, 1614, 1616. These optional communications links 1618, arenotable because it offers two important features; the ability from onemarket to another without using the national/international level ULDC1602, and also as an alternative communications link between the marketlevel ULDCN 1600, and the national/international level ULDC 1602, incase there is a break in one or more of the communications links 1630-B,1630-C, 1630-D, 1630-E, 1630-A, 1630-F, 1630-G, or 1630-H.

Now referring to FIG. 17, is an illustration of the architecture of aregionally based ULDCN 1700. Underneath the national/international ULDC1602, exists a plurality of district user location databasecoordinator's 1702 and 1704, with regional user location databasecoordinator's 1706, 1708, 1710, and 1712, and market user locationdatabase coordinator's 1604, 1606, 1608, 1610, 1620, 1612, 1614, and1616, under them respectively. Service providers 1300-A, 1300-B, 1302-A,and 1302-B, are positioned below the market user location databasecoordinators 1620, mentioned above. Optional communications links1714-A, 1714-B, 1714-C and 1714-D, exists between district and regionalULDC's 1502, in order to provide a more efficient means for routingqueries, to provide alternative routing possibilities in case of acommunications link break, or to compensate for hardware/softwareproblems within the ULDCN 1700. Queries within the ULDCN 1700, areperformed in accordance with the hierarchy process of query (HPQ).Queries are routed through communications links, which are permanentconnections such as (for example) TI lines 13 lines or microwave links1716-A, 1716-B, 1716-C, 1716-D, 1716-E, 1716-F, 1716-G, 1716-1-1;1716-I, 1716-J, 1716-K, 1716-L, 1716-M, 1716-N. These communicationslinks 1716-A through 1716-N, represent uplink (From ULD/ULDC) anddownlinks (From ULD/ULDC).

Now referring to FIG. 18, a direct system is illustrated for connectingto a user location database coordinator network 1800. This alternativeembodiment illustrates the means for service providers a plurality ofwireless network, to query a national/international user locationdatabase coordinator 1602 directly. These service providers 1300-A,1300-B, 1302-A, and 1302-B are linked to the national/international userapplication database coordinator 1602 via communications links 910-A,910-B, 910-C, and 910-0, which are permanent connections such as (forexample) TI lines T3 lines or microwave links. In an alternativeembodiment, the service provider may use an optional communications link1618 in order to provide an alternative method for routing queries.

Now examining FIG. 19, illustrates the external connectivity for sendingqueries to the ULDC 908. A plurality of sources as defined in theembodiments can query the ULDC 908. Additionally, an RF remote link1518-A could be set up that would allow queries from remotely enabledremote wireless devices 1900, such as laptop computers 2450, and otherdevices via a radio frequency (RF) link 1902. These devices would allowqueries to come from a plurality of remote wireless devices 1904.Queries can also come from services such as police 1906, emergencymedical services 1304 or authorized accounts and other entities 1908.The queries flow to the ULDC 908 and then to the ULD's 1512 and ULDC's1502 connected. The ULDC 908 follows the HPQ to collect results fromqueries.

Defining the external connectivity for queries of the ULDC 908 is a listof externally connected devices. These devices consist of a plurality ofusers/devices that can request data from the ULDC 908. They include:

-   -   A single ULDC higher on the hierarchy 1508    -   A plurality of ULD's 1512    -   A plurality of ULDC's 1502    -   EMS Services 1304    -   RF remote link 1518-A, and indirectly remote wireless query        devices 1904    -   Police 1906    -   Authorized accounts and others 1908        The ULDC 908 is able to multitask and process these connections        simultaneously and can be controlled via software multitasking        operations (common knowledge). This allows a large number and        complexity of ULD 900 queries to occur simultaneously at the        ULDC 908.

These devices each connect to the ULDC 908 in different ways. Theparallel or lower ULDC's 1502, and ULD's 1512 are attached connectionwith dedicated lines, satellite, Ti, T3, microwave, etc. 1500-C and1500-A. The plurality ULDC's 1502 higher in the hierarchy 1508 areconnected with a dedicated line, satellite, Ti, T3, microwave, etc.1500-B through the uplink port (see FIG. 15) of the ULDC 908. Theremaining devices connect individually through the dialup/fixedconnections 1306, 1500-D, 1910-A and 1910-B to the ULDC 908. Theservices using this method are the EMS services 1304, Police 1906, RFremote link 1518-A, and other authorized accounts 1908.

Each of the connected devices 1304, 1518-A, 1906, and 1908 using thedialup/fixed connection lines 1306, 1500-D, 1910-A, and 1910-B wouldneed software to interface with the ULDC 908. This software is commonknowledge by and software engineer to develop. It would consist of aprogram that would have database query abilities, a graphical userinterface, and ways to display and organize queries of the ULDC 908.

The RF remote link 1518-A connected to the ULDC 908 has specialrequirements. Itself, it cannot submit queries alone to the ULDC 908.Its primary function is to act as a bridge between the ULDC 908 andwireless device 104, specifically connected to the RF remote link1518-A. It converts signals from land lines 142, (TI coaxial, other)into a RF spectrum to be sent to the remote mobile devices 1900 designedfor the RF link 1910-C. Similarly the remote mobile devices 1900 thatcommunicate with the ULDC 908 send SF links 1910-C back to the ULDC 908.The RF remote link 1518-A organizes these signals by users and thenconverts them to landlines 142, (Ti, coax, other) and transmits thesignal back to the ULDC 908.

The functionality of this RF remote network 2500 (see FIG. 25) is toallow remote mobile devices 1900 in the field to be able to query theULDC 908 on a secure wireless RF link 1902 connection. The SF spectrumfor this FR link 1902 would most likely be between 200 MHz and 10 Ghz(or any desired frequency). This frequency would have to, however, beauthorized by the FCC for use.

The remote wireless devices 1900 could exist as laptop computers 2450.They would require an additional piece of hardware with a remote RFtransmitter/receiver 1518-A and an attached antenna 2430. This hardwarecould exist as a PCMCIA card with a connection to control hardware andthe antenna 2430. Software control would occur on the laptop computer2450, itself. The laptop 2450, would simply have to have the followingminimum requirements:

-   -   Sufficient processor/memory and computing ability to run the        query software    -   At least one PCMCIA type 1 or 3 slot.    -   Ability to function on battery power or other wireless power        source    -   Ability to power transmitting antenna sufficiently    -   Computable software operating system (OS) for query software.

The RF link 1902 would be sent using a secure method such as spreadspectrum with frequency hopping. Its signal would be sent as RF signals.The receiving antenna at the RF remote link 1518-A would therefore haveto be within the range of the remote wireless devices 1900 signal. Itwould require a transmit and receive antenna 2430 to send and receivesignals from the remote wireless devices 1900. This antenna 2430 shouldbe an omni directional antenna such as a quarter wave monopole. Therange of signals it can send and detect would be a function of thereceivers sensitivity and noise rejection ability. The rejection ofnoise should be greatly increased with the use of a spread spectrumsignal.

The benefits of the RF remote link 1518-A and its connected remotemobile devices 1900 it is a secure way to query the ULDC 908. The remotewireless devices 1900 could be carried by police 1906, EMS 1304, andauthorized accounts and other entities 1908 that may need to locatewireless devices 104 and their users 102 for emergencies or for anylawful reason.

FIG. 20 demonstrates the logic of the hierarchy of location methods. Thehierarchy decision algorithm is polled 2000 and the decision processproceeds. First the hierarchy attempts to calculate the location(latitude/longitude) of the mobile wireless device 104, using thedigital signature method 2010 as covered in prior art. Next it verifiesthe validity of the result by looking at the RSSI of surrounding towers2020. If the guess is valid it allows the result to be saved to the ULD2060. If the guess is invalid, the location is calculated based ontriangulation and RSSI 2030. Location is compared to fore mentionedcriteria (RSSI) 2040 and if the calculation is approved, the location issaved 2050 to the ULD 900. If the calculation was incorrect, thelocation is calculated based on RSSI 2040 only, and stored 2050 to theULD 900 (least accurate method).

In FIG. 20 the HOLM is described. It begins when data is sent from theBSC. The first method used is the digital signature method of U.S. Pat.No. 6,249,252 or similar. If the selection is validated (as shown inFIG. 21) the value is added to the ULD 900 entry. If not, combinationmethod based on triangulation and signal strength is used. If thatmethod is not valid the least accurate method based only on RSSI is used2050. FIG. 27 provides examples of location methods. It should be notedthat these location methods are only examples and can be changed ormodified in order to accommodate new location techniques.

FIG. 21 demonstrates the Compare (validation method in FIG. 20 (2020,2040) method when validating location. First, the computed value 2100 ispassed to the algorithm. It looks at whether all the towers in the rangeof the wireless device 104 are communicating with the wireless device104 (and their RSSI) 2110. Then are test zone is established 2120 thatis a large but definitive area based on the towers communicating withthe wireless device 104 is computed. The computed (original location) iscompared to the test zone 2130. If the computed value resides withinthis zone then the location is checked as valid 2160. If it is not, thenext method for location 2150 as shown in FIG. 20 is requested.

In FIG. 21 the error check method of the FIG. 20 is shown. After thevalue is computed for location, it is checked. All towers first reportRSSI of the wireless device 104. Location zone is then determined in arough sized area. If the measurement falls within this area then thelocation is accurate. If not a signal to use the next method isreturned. Alternatively, wireless devices 104 comprising locationequipment such as, for example, GPS, may also be considered as a sourcefor location information, and evaluated on the accuracy of the locationmethod utilized at the wireless device 104.

FIG. 22 illustrates e-mobility ULD queries 2200. E-mobility applications144 can directly query the local ULD 900 through its DLC 902. Thesee-mobility applications 144 can also query remote ULD's 1512 by sendingqueries through the switch (MTX or other) 130, through andstandardization process 906, to the upper ULDC's 1502 and consequentlyto any attached ULD's 1512 or ULDC's 1502.

When queries are returned they are passed based on the query ID back tothe e-mobility applications 144 by passing the result to the ULDC 908,though any standardization processes 906, to the switch (MTX or other)130, and then back to the original e-mobility application 144.

In FIG. 22 the method in which e-mobility applications 144 query remoteULD's 1512 is shown. They first send a query to the ULDC 908 through theswitch (MTX or other) 130 connection. The query is then sent to relativeULD's 1512 and ULDC's 1502 based on the HPQ. Results are then forwardedback to the ULDC 908 and to the switch (MTX or other) 130. At this pointthe result is then sent to the e-mobility applications 144.

FIG. 23 shows an illustration of the RF remote link 1518-A components.The ULDC 908 connects to the ULDC interface control hardware/software2340. Residing logically or physically in the unit is the RF linkmanagement hardware/software 2350 that controls decoding/coding ofmessage queues sent between the wireless query devices 1940 and the ULDC908. Next is the power control unit 2360 that powers the RF remote link1518-A and it's transmit/receive hardware. The maintenance unit 2310allows for external diagnostics and repair of the unit. The transmitcontrol unit 2320 controls data conversion to RF signals. The receivercontrol unit 2330 controls conversion of received RF Signals. Thetransmit unit 2304 amplifies and sends signals to the attached antenna2300 via coax antenna lead cable 2302. The receive unit 2308 connects tothe antenna and detects and isolates the received signals from theantenna 2300 originating from the wireless query devices.

Now referring to FIG. 24, the remote wireless devices can exist aslaptop computer 2450 or any other mobile computing device. They wouldrequire an additional piece of control hardware 2420 to control RFcoding and decoding as well as the ability to function as a REtransmitter/receiver 2420 for an attached antenna 2430. This hardwarecould exist as a PCMCIA card 2410 with a connection 2440 to controlhardware and the antenna 2460. Software control would occur on thelaptop 2450 itself. The laptop 2450 would simply have to have thefollowing minimum requirements:

-   -   Sufficient processor/memory and computing ability to run the        query software    -   At least one PCMCIA type 1 or 3 slot.    -   Ability to function on battery power or other mobile power        source    -   Ability to power transmitting antenna sufficiently    -   Computable Software operating system (OS) for query software.        The transmitted RF signals 1902 would be sent/received from the        RE remote Ink 1518-A that would process queries and send them to        the ULDC 908 via a data line 1500-D (Ti/fixed/or other).

FIG. 25 illustrates an RF remote link RF network 2500. To cover thedesired land area, towers should be placed as to target, first, denseurban areas. Ideally one RF remote link tower 1518-A would have coveragefor this are. Secondarily other antenna 1518-B and 1518-C could coverthis area. Then coverage for less populated areas such as urban 2520 andthe sub-urban 2530 would be covered subsequently. The frequency andseparation of towers 1518-A, 1518-B, and 1518-C in areas such assub-urban 2530 area need not be as dense because less call/queries frommobile query devices 1900 would occur here. The primary coverage is thedense populated 2510 areas.

FIG. 26 illustrates the design of a remote mobile query device 2440. Theprimary unit is a laptop computing device 2450 that has the requiredsoftware for its functionality to send/receive queries to the RF remotelink 1518-A. It then connects via a control card (possibly PCMCIA cardinterface 2410) to the RF interface control hardware/software unit 2640.This unit includes transmit and receive control units 2620, 2630 RFfront ends 2605, 2608 and an attached antenna 2430 to communicated viaRF signals with the RF remote link 1518-A. Queries to the ULDC 908originate from the wireless query device 1900 and are sent to the ULDC908 via RF transmissions to the remote RF link 1518-A.

FIG. 27 illustrates to hardware and data that is required by the fourrecommended methods of location. These methods each require differentelements to work appropriately. When deciding which method to use, careshould be taken that all elements are available (or substitutes). Theseelements include: switch (MTX), HLR, VLR, ULD, BSC, SIBS Shelves, BTS,wireless device, timing data, signal strength, call processinginformation, latitude/longitude of BTS's, radio tower, down tilt, regiontype, azimuth on sectors, HLRIVLR data. Other location methods may alsobe utilized. Alternatively, wireless devices 104 comprising locationequipment such as, for example, GPS, may also be considered as a sourcefor location information, and evaluated on the accuracy of the locationmethod utilized at the wireless device 104.

Operations Call Process—Interaction of Invention

To make clear the interactions of this invention and how it actuallyfunctions, refer to FIG. 11. It illustrates what happens when a wirelessdevice 104 makes a call and how it is tracked. The diagram shows eachlogical function in the process. Here is the process as described in theFIG. 11.

Call Originates 1100

-   -   1. ULDM 904 gets user information from the switches user        database 1165.    -   2. ULDM 904 checks ULD to see if the user already has a previous        entry 1160.    -   3. If user exists in the ULD, then the records' “log status”        flag is turned on 1160.    -   4. If user does not exist in ULD 900, then a new entry is made        for the user and flagged (log status) to “on” 1160.    -   5. The ULDM 904 now checks the entry for the “private” status of        the log 1170 (more specifically, existing entries that have been        modified by customer request as private).    -   6. If the entry is private, then the ULDM flags the entry as        ‘inactive” 1194 and stops monitoring 1196 phone.    -   7. If log is NOT private, the ULDM 904 accesses the BSC with the        call number, processes the ID number and retrieves data on the        call 1175.    -   8. ULDM 904 decodes data and calculates user's geographical        location (latitude/longitude) 1180.    -   9. ULDM 904 updates user entry in ULD 900 with geographic        information 1185.    -   10. ULDM 904 updates ULD 900 entry with the current time and        date 1185.    -   11. ULDM 904 continues updating ULD 900 entry for user while BSC        reports call as active 1185.    -   12. When call ends, ULDM 904 flags log as inactive 1194 and        stops monitoring 1196 call process ID number in BSC.

Still referring to FIG. 11, the user entry is created 1160. It firstchecks if the entry exists and then, if not, creates one using theformat subsequently described. Now referring to FIG. 9, to make thisprocess above work, the ULDM 904 has to gather timing information andother measurements, such as in U.S. Pat. No. 6,249,252, from the BSC118-A to make its calculations. Additionally, it combines this withwireless device 104 and radio tower with BTS 110-A, 110-B, and 110-Cinformation acquired from the switch (MIX or other) 130.

Information gathered from the BSC 118-A includes:

-   -   Timing (TDOA, RID) information from radio towers 110-A, 110-B,        and 110-C talking to the wireless device 104.    -   Signal strength measurements from radio towers 110-A, 110-B, and        110-C talking to wireless device 104.    -   Call Processing information in the call control        hardware/software of the BTS.

Information gathered from the switch (MTX or other) 130 include:

-   -   Directionality of each radio tower 110-A, 110-B, and 110-C        talking to wireless, such as AZIMUTH, DOWTILT, etc.    -   Telephone number and call processing ID#.    -   Latitude/Longitude/Altitude of the BTS/Radio Towers 110-A,        110-B, and 110C talking to the wireless device 104.

Specifically, the ULDM 904 uses multiple methods (covered in theforementioned patents) to determine latitude and longitude of a wirelessdevice 104 that involves the gathering of the fore mentioned data. Manymajor methods as covered under numerous patents have described, indetail, individual methods for acquiring a target location. The mostprominent and robust is covered in U.S. Pat. No. 6,249,252. As itsmethodology is quite complex, any individual seeking to understand itshould read it in its entirety. However good U.S. Pat. No. 6,249,252 is,it is recommended that a single method not be relied upon solely.Whereas some methods are good for dense urban terrain (conquering, RFmulti-path issues) as in the case of U.S. Pat. No. 6,249,252, others arebetter for suburban type terrain.

The choice in methodology as programmed into the software in the ULDM904 should be transparent to the effect that based on decision protocolsone method or a series of methods should be used in variouscircumstances automatically.

For dense urban areas with high multi-path, a method such as U.S. Pat.No. 6,249,252 or U.S. Pat. No. 6,249,680 should be used. These patentsdeal with high RF multi-path in a dense urban environment. As describedin their disclosures, they use digital signatures for key ‘reference”locations, allowing a wireless device's geographic location to beacquired with reasonable accuracy.

For suburban, rural or other relatively similar environments, simplerlocation determining methods should be used. Multi-path RF signals areless of an issue and the suburban methods above are far too complicatedand would require a high cost to implement, due to tuning. Therecommended method is a simpler TDOAJTOA method such as in U.S. Pat. No.6,167,275. These methods often also use receive strength as a function.

Often as the case may be, in practical purposes, one of the locationdetermining methods may still not be enough. In this case a third methodbased mainly on receive strength could be used (as covered in otheravailable patents). What is unique and should be a part of the locationdetermining software portion of this method, is the decision makingprocess on choosing which method to use is determined.

As a wireless network is deployed, sectors/antennas are classified asrural, suburban, etc., the decision-making software should firstreference this type’ and then choose which type of methods to use (U.S.Pat. No. 6,249,252 or like U.S. Pat. No. 6,167,275).

A final check should be to use signal strength (RSSI) to verify/discountan erroneous locations. If the location determined does not correspondto a reasonable value (latitude and longitude plus some degree of error)relative to receive strength, the other primary location determiningmethod should be used to calculate to location.

The selective use of these two location-determining methods, with avalidity check using RSSI of receiving antennas, should ensure areasonable location.

**Note: If both primary location-determining methods fail to give areasonable location, a very inaccurate estimate on RSSI could be used.

The selection of the location determining methodologies used todetermine geographic location, and priorities on each, should beselected based on the geographic conditions (terrain, tree density,building density, and other) of the wireless communications network.Therefore, the preceding recommendations could be altered and stillremain in the spirit of this invention.

ULD User Entries

All entries in the ULD 900 must have a coding standard. The ULDM 904uses this to create entries in the ULD 900. It is recommended that thefollowing standard coding technique be used for entries, as it is veryefficient.

Bits (ordered left to Data Type  0-39 User#  40-103 Location 104-151Date + Time 152 Log 153 Private 154-167 Spare

-   User ID# Format—XXX-XXX-XX)(X (10 digit) phone number of user 4 bits    per digit=40 bits-   Bits 0-39 Example: 813-513-8776    -   Binary—10000001001 10101000100111000011101110110

Location:

Bit 40 1 = North, 0 = South Bits 41-48 degrees (0-179) Bits 49-54minutes (0-59) Bits 55-60 seconds (0-59) Bits 61-64 hexiseconds (0-59)Bits 65 1 = West, 0-East Bits 66-73 degrees (0-179) Bits 74-79 minutes(0-59) Bits 80-85 seconds (0-59) Bits 86-89 hexiseconds (0-15) Bits90-103 spare (possibly used to denote accuracy)

-   Example: 39 degrees 13 minutes 12 seconds 8 hexiseconds North 8    degrees 25 minutes 18 seconds 5 hexiseconds West

Binary:

-   100100111001101 0011001000100001000011001010010010100000000000000-   HEX: 939A644219494000

Time & Date:

Bits 104-108 hour (0-24) Bits 109-114 minute (0-59) Bits 115-120 second(0-59) Bits 121-124 hexiseconds (0-15) Bits 125-128 month (0-12) Bits129-133 day (0-31) Bits 134-145 year (0-4095) Bits 146-151 extra

-   Example: 2248:05 12 hexiseconds 7/18/2001-   Binary: 10110110000000101110001111001001111101000100-   HEX: B602E3C9F44-   Log Status: Bit 152 1=logging    -   0=not logging-   Full Private: Bit 153 1=Full private mode    -   0=not full private-   Anonymous Bit 154 1=Anonymous Private-   Private O=Not Anonymous Private-   Spare Bits 154-153 extra for future development/expansion. This area    may be designated for future registers for other programs which need    to add data tot the users database configuration.-   Final data entry formatted value-using values in examples:-   HEX: 81351 38776939A64421 9494000B602E3C9F44000

Accessing the ULD

Repeating this process for every user creates the database on the ULD900. This database is now accessible via software three ways:

-   -   The ULDM 904        -   ULDM 904 is controlled by the BSS Manager 126        -   The BSS Manager 126 can then have access to the ULD 900            through the ULDM 904.    -   E-Mobility services 144 (having read only access to the ULD 900)        -   The ULDC 908 connection that allows remote queries (Connects            via switch (MTX or other) 130)

The first and most direct way to access the ULD 900 is from the BSSmanager 126. This device is allowed read, write, and append access tothe ULD 900 via the DLC 902. It can perform maintenance (editingentries) and other system level events. Querying the ULD 900 can bedeveloped on the software level by SQL or other database querytechniques. This patent does not cover nor intend to limit the creativeability of a programmer in developing ways in which to design thesoftware interfaces. These creative approaches would be within thespirit of the patent, as all software written for this invention wouldhave to be written into existing hardware that has proprietary design.However, is should be noted that this does limit the scope of thispatent in any way. It is easily achievable though common approach to asoftware engineer skilled in the area of database management, to writesoftware that could make direct queries of entries by multiple criteriaspecified by a user at the BSS manager 126.

The second method of accessing the ULD 900 is by e-mobility 144 softwareapplications that have read only privileges. These softwareapplications, by means of software SQL statements or other similardatabase query techniques, access user entries in the ULD 900: Softwareapplications such as these can include features like direction findingsoftware (accessible from the “wireless web”) where knowing the wirelessdevices 104 location is necessary. This type of e-mobility 144 softwareapplication is made possible by this unique invention—greatlysimplifying the amount of time needed in development of the code becauseit can use the information in the ULD 900.

The third method is by a connection to a remote ULDC 908. A ULDC 908 isan important element that should be (but is not required) available inconjunction with any ULD 900 or plurality of ULD's 1512. Its primaryfunction is to allow a plurality of connected devices, which can includeULD's 1512 and additional ULDC's 1502, to be remotely queried (using SQLor any other similar method) by any entity, person or other systemconnected to the ULDC's 1502 access ports. Uses of this could be foremergency services (911, EMS, etc), government requested “taps” andother purposes where locating a wireless device 104 would be useful.

ULDC Architecture

FIG. 17 shows a generic representation of the ULDC network (ULDN) 1600.Design can very, but the general hierarchy is always the same, withULDC's 1502 having only one parent (a ULDC 908) and having multiplechildren (either ULDC's 1502 or ULD's 1512) The connections 910-A,910-B, 910-C, and 910-D are dedicated data lines (Ti or other).

The internal diagram of a ULDC 908 is shown in FIG. 15. Its componentsare:

-   -   Direct e-mobility services 144    -   Standardization control hardware/software 906    -   Database logic center 902    -   Uplink connection 1506    -   Multiple downlink connections 1534        -   ULD access control unit 1536        -   ULDC access control unit 845    -   Remote access control unit 1516    -   Data logging unit 1522    -   Uplink/downlink optional expansion port 1538    -   Maintenance unit 1526    -   ULDC control hardware/software 1524    -   Master ULDM and location process 1528    -   Mirror database 1532    -   Market or group ULD 1530

The uplink connection 1506 should only be established with a single ULDC908 higher in the hierarchy of the ULDCN 1600. This connection 1500-B isa 2-way ATM connection carried on a Ti or other similar dedicated line,which allows queries from another ULDC 1508 higher on the networkhierarchy. The downlink consists of ULD's 1512 and ULDC's 1502 with canbe queried (by SQL or other database query means) directly by the ULDC908. There are two access control mechanisms, the ULD access controlunit 1510 and the ULDC access control unit 1536, which control accessprotocols for each type of query. These two devices negotiate and talkto ULD's 151 2and ULDC's 1502 sending and receiving data between them(queries and responses). The connections should be dedicated lines (Tior other similar) 1500-A or 1500-C.

The remote access control unit 1516 is responsible for negotiatingremote hosts 1540, either by dial-up or a dedicated means of connection,to the ULDC 908 for purposes of database query submission to obtaingeographic location information on wireless devices 104. These connecteddevices connect through the remote access control unit 1516 and submitqueries to it that then are sent to all connected devices for thesearch, finally returning the results to the logged on host.

To facilitate the querying process, any connected device should beassigned an ID#. These numbers are so when a query is sent, its original“owner” can be passed with it so the results are passed back to theright entity.

The data logging 1522 unit logs queries and the 1D# of the user who madethe query, to an internal storage device (internal hard drive or otherlarge data storage device). Lastly, the uplink/downlink optional port1538 is for future expansions such as redundant connections to otherULDC's 1502 to allow querying laterally in the hierarchy of the ULDCnetwork 1700, as in FIG. 17. Any alterations for specific needs or forcompatibility issues to the ULDC's 1502 architecture are conceded to bewithin the scope of this invention.

To expedite searches and to give a general flow, the following searchmethod is recommended for the ULDC 908 architecture. Alterations forspecific integration needs are within the spirit of the invention.

Searching the ULDC

Each ULDC 908 should contain data about itself in an internal registerthat is set when devices are attached to it. Such information includesthe area code of all the “home’ user entries on its system. “Home” usersare users that and listed in the HLR's (home location registrars) of theconnected devices. This indicates that users with these area codes havea high probability of being found in certain databases. So, generallythe area codes listed could include the area codes of users in the HLRof the switch (MIX's or others) 130 (connected to their respective ULD's1512) that are connected to the ULDC 908.

Each ULDC 908 contains a list (stored in data register) of all the areacodes off all searchable devices attached. These devices could be ULD's1512 or even other ULDC's 1502, where the list of the ULDC 908 (theULD's 1512 attached to it) would be added to the other higher ULDC's1502 connected to their uplink ports. In this way any ULDC 908 would haveall area codes of the database's HLR's below it in the hierarchy.

Access ID#'s are assigned to any entity or connection to the ULDC 908that can submit a query. For example, the uplink connection could be bydefault #1, the plurality of remote terminals could be #2 or higher.This ID is referenced to all queries so results can be associated withthe original owner.

When a search begins, the ULDC 908 query first searches the “chain” ofconnected devices FIG. 15 looking first at the ULD's 1512 that containsthe area code of the queried entry. If no attached ULD 900 contains thearea code, then the ULDC 908 then looks at the ULIJC's 1502 with thearea code. Doing so causes a great decrease in search time. Thiscontinues on until the ULD 900 with the user entry is found.

The general flow of a query is in FIG. 14. It begins by the ULDC 908being in IDLE mode (not being queried) waiting for a query. A logged ondevice sends a query in the form of a phone number and includes it ID#.The query and ID# are logged to the internal logging database. The ULDC908 searches all connected devices, then when the result is found, it isreturned to the ID# included with the query. The logged on device, orhost, then acknowledges the data. At this point the ULDC 908 goes backto idle mode.

A pseudo-code for a search algorithm may look similar to this. Done inSQL or any similar database query language, this would access the ULDC908 and search for entries.

  Input Query From Host   //check attached devices for area code  //descriptor   m=(number of attached devices)   Let n=0 Start n-n+1  If attached device n (list of area codes) includes query area code  Then go to Find {directly query ULD 900)   Else if n=m go to end  Else if n<m go to start Find (repeat process for all layers ofdevices) *When this search gets to a ULD 900 it should directly queryit. If no entry is found it should continue then by search all devicesunder the ULDC 908 (queried) in the hierarchy.

CONCLUSIONS, RAMIFICATIONS AND SCOPE

Possible issues that could arise involve privacy and the concern formisuse/abuse. These issues have been considered while developing thistechnology, and measures to eliminate these worries are implemented inthe device.

Marking user entries as private can reduce privacy worries. Customerservice or any other entities connected to the ULD 900 control softwarewould make the change.

When the system is told to track a user (when the user communicates withthe network on his/her wireless device the ULDM 904 automaticallystarts) a check by the ULDM 904 is immediately done to see if a “fullprivacy” flag 1170 has been set. If it is, tracking location of thewireless devices 104 by the ULDM 904 and any modification of the entryin the database does not occur. Using this technology, the system cannotinadvertently track users, and privacy is assured. If an “anonymousprivacy” flag is set, location information for a user account can onlybe retrieved—but no user information will be sent. This can be used byexternal applications that only require the location of a plurality ofdevices, without regard to user information. Such an application likethe Directional Assistance Network uses this to anonymously find deviceson roadways.

Additional concerns lie in who can access this information. Because allinformation is stored at the switch (MTX or other) 130 of the network,direct access (and append/write access) to the database can only occurthere. This assures that no other wireless device 104 on the network cantamper with this information. Only authorized personnel at the switch(MTX or other) 130 or persons remotely accessing it through the ULDC 908have access.

Results of this database and control system are that a diverse range ofsoftware applications can be developed that could access and utilize thedatabase. Emergency services could find users on wireless devices 104 onthe network, increasing general public health in medical emergencieswhen users have a wireless device 104.

Other “e-mobility” 144 software applications could also access thedatabase giving the users of the wireless device 104 access to servicessuch as direction finding software, location/mapping information andmany other portals. The benefit is that this information is controlledand stored by a central entity (the ULD 900 on the network, creating auniversal portal that is centrally manageable.

This technology was previously only available to a limited extent by GPSsoftware. GPS requires that a device have its antenna outdoors or inrelatively plain view of the sky to work properly. Cost and bulky sizingare also problems with GPS equipment as compared to cellular mobiledevices 104. Additionally, adding GPS to wireless devices 104 wouldintegrate smoothly into this invention. It would simply make it notnecessary for location calculations to be done at the ULDM 904.Currently, with an increasing amount of wireless devices 104 connectedto wireless (CDMA, TDMA, GSM or other) networks 100, it only seemsnatural that expanding this technology would benefit the population as awhole.

While the invention has been described in connection with a preferredembodiment, it is not intended to limit the scope of the invention tothe particular form set forth, but on the contrary, it is intended tocover such alternatives, modifications, and equivalents as may beincluded within the spirit and scope of the invention as defined by theappended claims.

Network Tuning System; Summary of the Invention

The present invention is directed generally to a machine and process forcalculating and displaying wireless device locations and wirelessnetwork service problems with reference to related wireless devices onthe said wireless network. The present invention can be referred to as adisplay system and a wireless network tuning system (WNTS). Thisinvention uses a method(s) for locating wireless devices and referencingtheir location and performance with wireless network known parameters.The invention allows more readily accessible representation of wirelessdevice locations on a display screen and problems to be presented towireless network engineers.

More generally, the present invention is directed to a computationalmachine and process for displaying wireless device locations, and fordetecting and referencing wireless network errors with specificgeographical location information of the affected wireless devices. Thepresent invention then can allow a detailed display of the wirelessnetwork's problems, and correct the network's problems with a faultdiagnosis and correction system. In an additional embodiment, thepresent invention can provide a means to display other user selectedobjects including, locations of radio towers and BTS's, serviceeffecting factors, criss-cross phonebook database entries, and ageographic/topographic map overlay. Other customized user-selectedobjects may be displayed as an auxiliary overlay to the display screen.

In an alternative embodiment, this customized display criteria can becreated and viewed by users within the wireless network and to usersoutside of the wireless network and can act as a resource for otherhardware and software which have a need to display locations of wirelessdevices.

In a second alternative embodiment, the present invention provides ameans for generating “case files” which can be customized by a user toprovide customized queries when a user has a need for information basedon, or relating to, the location of a single wireless device or aplurality of wireless devices. This customized criteria is retrieved inthe form of a “case file” that can be created and interfaced by userswithin the wireless network and to users outside of the wirelessnetwork.

The abilities of this invention would be to offer a means of displayingthe location of a plurality of wireless devices on a display screen, andto allow wireless network engineers to monitor and debug wirelessnetwork problems from the switch (MTX or other) with little or no actualfield testing. Problems recorded in the field could be resolved withoutdelay. The WNTS functions in a basic sense by monitoring the wirelessnetwork for problems that affect service to connected wireless devices.When these problems are detected the WNTS can then monitor and track allwireless devices in the problem area and record data on faults andproblems these wireless device incur relevant to theirlatitude/longitude. The WNTS can then correct the problem automatically,or make suggestions to the wireless network engineers for the possiblecause of the problem and corrective actions, which may fix the problem.

The most common method to debug these problems is for engineers to go tothe field and take limited “snaps shots” of the wireless network thatonly record data for brief periods of time on limited wireless devices.The process and machine as claimed within, allows a plurality ofwireless devices to be monitored and recorded over a period of time, aswell as wireless network parameters as they interact with the wirelessdevices, and additionally record faults these wireless devices incur atspecific geographic locations.

To be able to employ the embodiments of this method, process, andmachine, you must have the ability to find and locate wireless deviceson the wireless network. Also, an additional technology that would allowrapid access to this data would be a dynamic database or system designedto store and hold information including latitude and longitude of thesaid wireless devices. The ability to determine the user's geographiclocation in the form of latitude and longitude data is disclosed in anattached document entitled, “A machine for providing a dynamic databaseof geographic location information for a plurality of wirelesscommunications devices and process for making same”. This documentreferenced above, is a United States Provisional Patent, U.S. Ser. No.60/327,327, which was filed on Oct. 0, 2001. This provisional patentapplication references the use of user location databases (ULD), userlocation database coordinators (ULDC), and other location means The useof ULD, ULDC, and other location means is disclosed (offered only as anexample of location means) in the fore mentioned provisional patentapplication, but can also include other means of location including awireless device comprising a global positioning system (GPS).

The fore mentioned provisional patent provides a system that allows aplurality of wireless devices on a plurality of wireless networks tohave their geographical location as well as other bit, of data stored toeasily accessible databases continually.

A system such as this allows a plurality of wireless devices to betracked, and have their locations stored on a dynamic database for queryfrom a plurality of sources. In an alternate embodiment, the dynamicdatabase could be created and contained within the current invention,and could track and store in memory or a physical database, thegeographic location and data of designated wireless devices.

This current invention provides a machine and process with a primarygoal to allow a new and novel way to correlate wireless network problemsand the manner in which they affect wireless devices on the wirelessnetwork and also to provide a trouble shooting system to suggestcorrective actions to correct wireless network problems. Such a WNTSwould allow a fast and efficient way to optimize a wireless network,without the need for field-testing by wireless network engineers.

In an alternative embodiment, the current invention also offers a meansfor displaying the geographic location of an individual wireless deviceor a plurality of wireless devices on a display screen. The ability todisplay the location of wireless devices on a display screen is a usefuland novel feature which can be utilized by other applications whichrequire the ability to view and monitor the location of wirelessdevices. This alternative embodiment also allows for overlays of ageographic street map display and a criss-cross phonebook display andother user selected displays.

Detailed descriptions of the preferred embodiment are provided herein.It is to be understood, however, that the present invention may beembodied in various forms. Therefore, specific details disclosed hereinare not to be interpreted as limiting, but rather as a basis for theclaims and as a representative basis for teaching one skilled in the artto employ the present invention in virtually any appropriately detailedsystem, structure or manner. For example, the components containedwithin the current invention may reside within the same physicalhardware, or the components may reside outside the physical hardware.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

Referring to FIG. 28 the primary architecture of the embodiments 2800are illustrated. The main divisions between an existing wireless network100, and the primary embodiment 2800 are illustrated. The components inthe primary embodiments are:

Elements of the Machine and Process (2800)

The primary elements of the machine and process include:

-   -   Monitoring software 2802    -   BSC access control software 2804    -   Fault diagnosis and correction software 2806    -   Device location software 2808    -   User location database 900    -   User location database coordinator 908    -   Geographic information database 2810    -   Criss-cross phonebook database with lat/long correlations 2812    -   Standardization/conversion hardware/software 906    -   Primary analytic software 2814    -   Internal central processing unit and computer 2816    -   Internal memory storage 2818    -   Case files with lat/long correlations 2820    -   Service effecting factors with lat/long correlations 2822    -   Radio tower lat/long correlations 2824    -   User interface software 2826    -   Correlating mapping software 2828    -   Correlating data for lat/long information 2830    -   Display software 2832

These elements are considered to be the basic requirements for such asystem. Additional software and or hardware could easily be added tocustomize or extend the abilities of this invention (FIG. 28, Box 2800)without escaping the limits of its intentions and the spirit of itsnovelty.

Monitoring Software 2802:

The monitoring software 2802 is designed to monitor a wireless network100 for errors or problems that result in service disruption to wirelessdevices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D within the radio tower network 105.These errors could result in degradation or even loss or service to thewireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D. The monitoring software2802 interacts directly with the base station controller (BSC) 118-A andthe primary analytic software 2814.

The monitoring software 2802 intercepts and decodes error codes producedby the BSC 118-A and interprets their effects on the wireless device104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D. If the error is service affecting then thefault is send to the primary analytic software 2814. The faultmonitoring software 2802 acts as an accessory to the primary analyticsoftware 2814, which is where any interpretations of faults are made.

Base Station Controller (BSC) Access Control Software 2804:

The base station controller (BSC) access control software 2804 isresponsible for interfacing the components and processes of the currentinvention 2800 with the BSC 2804 of a wireless network 100. The BSC 2804contains all the call information as well as all the information onwireless network faults. It should be noted that some wireless networkdesigns have the network fault information stored elsewhere, and thatthe BSC access control software 2804 could be used to access thatinformation at any other location also. The BSC access control software2804 interacts directly with the BSC 118-A and the primary analyticsoftware 2814.

The BSC access control software 2804 has the primary function of servingas an intermediary software package that can interlace the currentinvention 2800 and the BSC 118-A and switch (MTX or other) 130.

Fault Diagnosis/Correction Software 2806:

The fault diagnosis and correction software 2606 is activated when aservice-affecting fault is sent from the monitoring software 2802 to theprimary analytical software 2814. When the primary analytical software2814 receives the fault, the primary analytical software 2814 generatesa case file 2820. The fault diagnosis and correction software 2806examines the factors of the case file 2820, the service effectingfactors with lat/long 2822, the radio tower and BTS with lat/long 2824,and the geographic information database with lat/long 2910.

The fault diagnosis and correction software 2806 comprises aprogrammable diagnosis and correction system, which can be serviced andupdated through a user input device (BSS manager or other) 126. When acase file 2820 is generated by the primary analytic software 2814, thepossible causes of the fault are determined by matching the datacontained in the case file 2820 against a list of possible fault causingfactors. Once a number of possible causes for the fault have beenisolated, the fault diagnosis and correction software 2806 can thenperform diagnostic testing within the wireless network 100 to eliminatefalse positives, and provide a list of possible causes and correctiveactions which may by preformed by the wireless network engineers.

The fault diagnosis and correction software 2806 can operate in threemodes:

-   -   Passive diagnosis mode    -   Active diagnosis mode    -   Automatic correction mode        The passive diagnosis mode examines contents of the case file        2820, along with the service effecting factors with lat/long        2822, the radio tower and BTS with lat/long 2824, and the        geographic information database with lat/long 2810. Once the        circumstances of the fault has been matched against the list of        possible fault causing factors, and a list of likely causes and        corrective actions are determined and tested, the list possible        causes and suggested corrective actions is added to the case        file 2820. When wireless network engineers examine the case file        2820, they can view the list possible causes and suggested        corrective actions generated by the fault diagnosis and        correction software 2806.

The active diagnosis mode allows network engineers to use the automateddiagnostic features of the fault diagnosis and correction software 2806to automate the diagnosis and correction process. The active diagnosismode is a completely user definable mode. It allows the user to definecertain radio towers with BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E,wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D, or other criteria to bemonitored for faults. This mode requires actual input from the wirelessnetwork engineers and cannot start automatically.

Benefits of this mode would be to monitor problems or areas that wouldnot be triggered in the passive mode, or to monitor problems that areanticipated in advance.

The automatic correction mode can be programmed by the wireless networkengineers to operate both in the passive diagnosis mode and the activediagnosis mode. When the automatic correction mode is activated, thefault diagnosis I correction software 2806 is allowed to makeadjustments to the wireless network 100 if the result of the faultdiagnosis testing prove conclusively (or to a very high probability)that the cause of the fault has been determined and that a determinedcorrective action will fix the problem. When a corrective action is madein the automatic correction mode, the cause of the fault and correctiveaction taken are recorded in the case file 2820.

Device Location Software 2808:

The device location software 2808 is the package that when activated bythe primary analytic software 2814 is able to retrieve information froma database such as a ULD 900, or a ULDC 908, that holds geographicinformation (as well as time, date of the acquired geographicinformation). Additionally, as an alternative embodiment this devicelocation software 2808 can directly query the BSC 118-A and calculatethe location of a wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D, asinstructed by the primary analytic software 2814. The device locationsoftware 2808 interacts directly with the BSC 118-A, the primaryanalytic software 2814, the ULD 900 and/or ULDC 908.

The device location software 2808 should be able to be passed queries toreturn the location of:

-   -   A specific wireless device    -   All wireless devices on specific BTS's    -   All wireless devices on a plurality of BTS's        The device location software 2808 would directly query a dynamic        database as discussed above (ULD 900, ULDC 908) to retrieve        individual locations for wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C or        104-D. Alternatively, if no ULD 900 or ULDC 908 were available,        the device location software 2808 would directly access and        decode the BSC 118-A in order to determine the individual        location of the wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D. The        device location software can also retrieve the location of        wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-0, equipped with a GPS        system, or other means of determining geographic location such        as triangulation, round trip delay, or other means.

If a plurality of individual wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, and104-D were queried, they would all be sequentially resolved by queriesto the ULD 900, the ULDC 908, device location software 2808, by directaccess and decoding of the BSC 118-A, or by querying the wireless device104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D.

If a specific radio tower and BTS 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E (andthus all wireless devices connected 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D) isrequested. Then the device location software 2808 would first query, bymeans of the BSC access control software 2804, the BSC 206 and retrieveinformation on which wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D whereconnected to a given radio tower and BTS 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D,110-E. The results of this action would be to retrieve the ID#'s for allthe wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D connected to any radiotower and BTS 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E.

If plurality of radio tower and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E(and thus all wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D connected to)are requested, then the device location software 2808 would first query,by means of the BSC access control software 2804, the BSC 118-A andretrieve information on what wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-Dwhere connected to all given radio towers and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C,110-D, 110-E. The results of this action would be to retrieve the ID#'sfor all the wireless devices 104-A,104-B, 104-C, 104-0, connected to allrequested radio towers and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E.

User Location Database 900:

A user location database (ULD) 900, is covered under United StatesProvisional Patent, U.S. Ser. No. 60/327,327, which was filed on Oct. 4,2001, is an important element of this invention, but is not required. AULD 900 is a database comprising a means for obtaining and storing thegeographical data, user information, date/time information and/or usercontrolled settings information for the plurality of wireless devices104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D. This information can be retrieved throughe-mobility services 144 as well as though direct queries of either theBSS manager 126 or ULDC 908.

As related to the current invention 2800, the ULD 900 is accessedthrough an e-mobility connection 2834 and can then supply locationinformation about wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D connectedto the wireless network 100. The ULD 900 may physically reside withinthe current invention 2800 or as an alternative embodiment, may bephysically located outside the current invention 2800, and accessed, forexample through e-mobility services 144. Availability of the entries inthe database of wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104C, 104-D depends onthe implementation of the ULD 900 into the switch (MTX or other) 130architecture, as not to be covered by this Patent. Noted, should be theability of an e-mobility service 144 to be able to calculate locationinformation by direct query of the BSC 118-A or using other hardware,and following similar methods in acquiring this data as done by the ULD900.

User Location Database Coordinator 908:

A user location database coordinator (ULDC) 908, is covered under U.S.Provisional Patent, U.S. Ser. No. 60/327,327, which was filed on Oct. 4,2001, is an important element that should be (but is not required)available in conjunction with any ULD 900 or plurality of ULD's 1512.Its primary function is to allow a plurality of connected devices, whichcan include ULD's 1512 and additional ULDCs 1502, to be remotely queried(using SQL or any other similar method) by any entity, person or othersystem connected to the ULDC's 1502 access ports. Uses of this could befor emergency services (911, EMS, etc), government requested “taps” andother purposes where locating a wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C,104-D would be useful.

The current embodiment 2800 can use a ULDC 908 to access information onother switches (MTX or other) 130 or physical devices such to obtainlocation information not contained in its own database. This isespecially important when there may be more than a single switch (MTX orother) 130 in a given geographic area. The usefulness is that a ULDC 908will integrate a plurality of switch (MTX or other) 130 networkstogether and for a super network, in which a larger diagnostic area canbe established.

Geographic Information Database 2810:

A geographic information database 2810 is a software database. Thegeographic information database 2810 can reside physically separate asin part of any other storage media connected to the primary analyticsoftware 2814. It contains in part or in whOle database information on:

-   -   Roadway locations (correlated to latitude/longitude)    -   Landmark locations (correlated to latitude/longitude)        -   Residential locations        -   Commercial building locations        -   Railway locations        -   Other user defined objects    -   Topological survey information        -   Altitude referenced to latitude/longitude        -   Ground slope        -   Other topological data (user customizable)    -   Location information of wireless network equipment        -   BTS        -   BTS repeaters        -   Other equipment    -   Ground clutter    -   User defined class of objects

The geographic information database 2810 is used to implement a layer ofgeographic information onto a display screen 2836, which is seen by auser of the current invention 2800. When the data from the geographicinformation database 2810 is combined with factors accumulated by theprimary analytic software 2814, the primary display software 2832 canproduce useful and convenient data analysis to a user.

Criss-Cross Phonebook with Lat/Long Database 2812:

The criss-cross phonebook with latitude and longitude database 2812enables internal or external applications to request phonebook listingson a cross-referenced basis. The criss-cross phonebook database 2812comprises the longitude and latitude of listings sorted by names,addresses and phone numbers of residences, businesses, wireless devices,and government agencies, as well as category of goods/services sold (forbusiness listings) and the price and availability of said goods andservices. The criss-cross phonebook database 2812 can be queried andcross referenced by name, telephone, street address, category of goodsand/or services, availability of product and price of goods/services,latitude and longitude, These requested listings may be overlaid ontothe display screen 2836 along with other requested display layers.

This criss-cross phonebook database 2812 is a novel and usefulembodiment to the current invention 2800, because it would allow adisplay screen 2836 to display, for example, the location of local areahospitals overlaid on the display screen 2836 with the location of awireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D, and a street map from thegeographic information database 2810. This embodiment would enable auser of a wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D to easily determinetheir geographic position and the geographic location and direction tothe closest hospital. Another example would be that it would enable apolice department to monitor the locations of the wireless devices104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D used by police officers. When the policedepartment receives a call for police response, the police departmentwould be able to determine which police officer is best able to respond.May other examples exist regarding the usefulness of this embodiment forgovernment, business and private users.

Standardization/Conversion Hardware/Software 906;

The standardization/conversion hardware/software 906 provides a means tostandardize and convert protocols thereby providing standardized andconverted protocols. These standardized and converted protocols providea means for the elements of the present invention 2800 to interface withelements outside of the present invention 2800. See FIG. 30 forflowchart of this embodiment.

Primary Analytic Software 2814:

The primary analytic software 2814 is the actual processing center ofthe current invention 2800. The primary analytic software 2814 is wherecorrelations between wireless network problems and the related wirelessdevices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D occur. The primary analytic software2814 controls all claimed embodiments as listed in FIG. 28, Box 2800.The primary analytic software 2814 connects to the monitoring software2802, BSC access control software 2804, fault diagnosis/correctionhardware/software 2806, device location software 2808, geographicinformation database 2810, criss-cross phonebook database 2812,standardization/conversion hardware/software 906, the user interfacesoftware 2826 and display software 2832.

The primary analytic software 2814 can run in three ways

-   -   Passive scanning mode    -   Active scanning mode    -   Inactive

In the passive scanning mode of the primary analytic software 2814 isable to monitor and decode all the wireless network errors received fromthe monitoring software 2802. All the errors have been pre-filtered bythe monitoring software 2802 and include only service affecting errors.

A configurable element of the primary analytic software 2814 is thelevel or specific errors that would be considered for the passive mode.These level or specific errors are user defined by configuring them inthe primary analytic software's 2814 configuration file. This methodwould allow specific errors to be monitored passively withoutsupervision by a network engineer.

When a valid error occurs, the primary analytic software 2814 beginslogging the error to a case file 2820. Then the primary analyticsoftware 2814 analyzes the case file 2820 and retrieves the wirelessdevice's 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D 1D#and additionally retrieves theradio tower and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E involved in theerror (or alternatively all the radio towers and BTS's 110-A, 110-B,110-C, 110-D, 110-E talking to the wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C,104-D. Using this information, the primary analytic software 2814 knowswhat area of the radio tower network 108 to monitor.

Now, the device location acquisition software 2802 will be queried bythe primary analytic software 2814 to retrieve the identity of the radiotower and BTS 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E 1D#'s that were involvedwith the error codes in the open case file 2818. The result of the querywill contain the latitude and longitude as well as the time of theerror. The primary analytic software 2814 then continually queries thedevice location software 2808 with the given radio tower and BTS's110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E thus monitoring all activity on them.The data recorded to the case file 2820 is:

-   -   Latitude and longitude of wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C,        104-D on the radio tower and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D,        110-E    -   Errors codes on the radio tower and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C,        110-D, 110-E coded to the wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C,        104-D involved    -   Service effecting factors for each wireless device 104-A, 104-B,        104-C, 104-D tracked on the radio tower and BTS's 110-A, 110-B,        110-C, 110-D, 110-E

-   Forward receive power (FIG. 37, BOX 3704)

-   Forward transmit power (FIG. 37, BOX 3706)

-   Ec/lo (FIG. 37, BOX 3708)

-   Neighbor lists (FIG. 37, BOX 3710)

-   Other user definable factors (FIG. 37, BOX 3712)    -   Fault diagnosis and correction software's diagnosis and        corrective action recommended and/or taken.    -   Radio tower and BTS latilong 2824

The primary analytic software 2814 continues to update the case file2820 for a user definable time period. When the time is up the case file2820 is closed and saved to a hard disk. A message is sent to the userinput device 126 (BSS manager or other) 126 alerting that a case file2820 has been created and giving the initial error that caused the casefile 2820 to be started.

The active scanning mode of the primary analytic software 2814 is acompletely user definable mode. It allows the user to define certainradio towers and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-0, 110-E, wirelessdevices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D, or other criteria to be monitored.This mode requires actual input from the network engineers and cannotstart automatically.

Benefits of this mode would be to monitor problems or areas that wouldnot be triggered in the passive mode, or to monitor problems that areanticipated in advance.

Internal CPU and Computer 2816:

The internal CPU and computer 2816 are a user preference based on systemdemand. They could be part of or even exist as hardware currently in thewireless network 100. Alternately, new hardware could be supplied thatcan power and run the current invention's 2800 software. The memorybandwidth and CPU power would have to be server level. RAM should be ofthe ECC type, and a parallel process architecture would surely result inhigher performance.

Internal Storage 2818:

Internal storage 2818 of the current invention's 2800 data can becontained in any hardware realizable data storage unit. This internalstorage 2818 unit must have the ability to change its size dynamicallyor have sufficient size such that expansion or reduction in databasesize will not exceed the physical storage maximum.

For redundancy a suggested method is to employ a RAID storage systemwhere multiple physical storage units contain the same data. Theyoperate simultaneously to protect the data. If one unit fails thenanother is still running and can provide the data.

Speed is also an important factor. Additional RAID designs employstriping techniques to increase access time of stored data on thephysical storage device. The physical storage devices can behard-drives, magnetic storage media, or other storage methods commonlyavailable.

The RAID design would be particularly valuable with regards to the ULD900 and ULDC 908. The RAID design offers a “mirror” database, therebylimiting the demands created by continues quires to the wireless network100.

Case Files 2820:

Still referring to FIG. 28, this diagram also illustrates thetranslation of a case file 2820. The interaction from the user isinitiated in the user interface software 2826. The primary analyticsoftware 2814 then sends a queue to the primary display software 2832for the requested case file 2820.

Operating in parallel, the case file 2820 is accessed and data isinterpreted by the display software 2832. The lat/long information iscalculated and correlated with the recorded data. The correlatingmapping software 2828 then brings this information together as shown inFIG. 41 and displays it to the display screen 2836 for the user 2848.

Service Effecting Factors with Lat/Long 2822:

Factors that can be elected to be contained as part of a case file orsimply to be track can contain in part or in whole:

-   -   RF signal parameters        -   Forward receive power        -   Forward transmit power        -   Packet/frame loss (frame error rate)        -   Signal/noise level        -   Fading        -   Other user defined objects    -   Call success factors        -   Dropped calls        -   Blocked calls        -   Access failures        -   Handoff sequences            -   Hard hand-offs            -   Soft-hand-offs            -   Inter-system hand-offs        -   Call initiate        -   Call end        -   Other user defined objects    -   Messaging        -   BTS forward messaging        -   Mobile acknowledgements        -   BTS reverse messaging        -   Error codes        -   Call process messaging        -   Hand-off messaging        -   Call initialization messaging        -   Call ending messaging        -   Other user defined objects    -   Mobile connection type        -   Active—voice        -   Active—data        -   IDLE (paging)        -   Other user defined objects

Radio Tower and BTS Information 2824:

Radio tower and BTS 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E locationinformation should be located in the switch (MTX) 130 as part of current2G/3G wireless network 100/200 information. The following information iscopied into the geographic information database 2810 from the radiotower and BTS information 2824:

-   -   Latitude    -   Longitude    -   Antenna height    -   Azimuth    -   Down-tilt    -   Beam-width    -   Other user defined objects

User Interface Software 2826:

The user interface software 2826 is a simple software package thatsimply defines the look and feel for interfacing with the said machineand process 2800. It allows setting to be adjusted, configuration filesto be created, and a plurality of other factors to be interfaced with.It also allows a graphical user interface (GUI) to be presented to theuser 2848. It connects to the user input devices (BSS manager or other)126 and the primary analytic software 2814. As the step is purely andinterface problem and is common knowledge to a software programmer, anymethod employed here is easily within the scope of this invention,

Correlated Mapping Software 2828:

The correlated mapping software 2828 is a realizable software packagethat the current invention 2800 uses to integrate information from theuser location database 900, the user location database coordinator 908,the geographic information database 2810, the criss-cross phonebookdatabase 2812, the device location software 2808, the case files 2820,the service effecting factors 2822, the radio tower and BTS's 110-A,110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E and other sources as directed by the displaysoftware 2832.

This correlated mapping software 2828 takes all these factors andvisually overlays them as to produce an output containing a completeoutput to the user. The correlated mapping software 2828 extrapolateslocations of the case files 2820 contents over time. The physicaldisplay can be programmed by the end user for a plurality of displayoptions. These options can include:

-   Service affecting factors 2822 related to individual radio tower and    BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E-   Case files 2820 data at specific times-   Receive strength over entire case file 2820 plotted geographically-   Individual call messaging and indicated with symbols (ex: square for    a drop call placed geographically where the drop occurred.)-   User location database 900 data-   User location database coordinator 908 data-   Geographic information database 2810 data-   Criss-cross phonebook database 2812 data-   Device location software 2808 data-   Other user defined objects 2848

See FIG. 39 for flowchart of this embodiment.

Correlated Data for Lat/Long Information 2830:

This information is simply the final form of the data before it isprocessed into the final display output for a user 2848. It hasprocessed by the correlated mapping software 2828 already.

Display Software 2832:

The display software 2832 is where the visual output for a case fileFIG. 41 is generated. When the user input device (BSS manager or other)126 requests a case file 2820, the display software 2832 is activated todecode and display a meaningful representation to a person at theconsole. It connects to the display screen 2836 and the primary analyticsoftware 2814.

First the display software 2832 generates an error code list that thatdisplays all the case files 2820 and which radio towers and BTS's 110-A,110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E, were involved. The display software 2832then decodes the errors and correlates them to the specific wirelessdevices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D involved and plots the errors on amap. This map would have to location of wireless devices 104-A, 104-B,104-C, 104-D when the error occurred. It also superimposes the networkfactors it recorded for the wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-Dfor a user defined time, before and after the error occurred.

Alternately, the latitude and longitude coordinates could be translated.Current common knowledge software packages (example: Street Atlassoftware) allow latitude and longitude coordinates to be translated intoaddressing information relative to roads and specific postal addressing.Latitude and longitude coordinates obtained by GPS systems on thewireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D or a location retrievedthough a ULD 900 or ULDC 908 or similar device would be converted tostandard addressing.

Using this method, the engineer can see every wireless device 104-A,104-B, 104-C, 104-D that had problems and generated errors, and look atwhat happened before the problem, and what the result of the error hadon the wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D. The huge benefit isthat the actual location that the error occurred can be seen withouthaving to do field-testing. For example, a case file 2820 could show adropped call for a wireless device 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D, and showthat the ec/lo increased dramatically before the drop. It would alsoshow exactly where it occurred and include the all the network factorsat the time of the error.

This is a very beneficial visual display because the engineer can see aplurality of wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D that had thesame problem and quickly find a solution to the problem.

Interactions between components in FIG. 28 are indicated ascommunications links which are used as passive links 2840-A, 2840-B inthe primary analytic software's 2814 passive scanning mode, active links2846-A, 2846-B, 2846-C in the active scanning mode, and passive linkand/or active links 2834, 2844-A, 2844-B, 2844-C, 2844-D, 2844-E,2844-F, 2844-G, 2844-H, 2844-I and 2846-A in both the passive and activescanning modes. These passive and active links may by T-1 lines, T-3lines, dedicated lines, intersystem logical connections 132 and/orother, depending on the actual physical configuration and geographiclocation of the components.

Other links which are illustrated in FIG. 28, and which also act aspassive and active links include the 1-1 lines 2844-A, 2844-B, 2844-C,2844-D and 2844-E, which connect the radio towers and BTS's 110-A,110-B, 110-C, 110-D 110-E in the radio tower and BTS network 108, to theBSC 118-A. The BSC 118-A is connected to the switch (MTX or other) 130by an intersystem logical connection 132. The switch (MTX or other) 130is connected to the publicly switched telephone network 138 with anintersystem logical connection 150. The switch (MTX or others) 130 isconnected to the e-mobility services 144 by an intersystem logicalconnection 148. The intersystem logical connections 132, 150 and 148 canalso act as passive and active links for the primary analytic software2814.

Now referring to FIG. 29 is a description of the physical realization ofthe preferred embodiment. It shows the way in which the embodiment ofthe said invention can be realized by the use of its supportinghardware. The software detailed by the said embodiment is contained inthe hardware. The hardware is required though for a successfulimplementation of the embodiment, and should be seen as such.

Shown also, is a network with a central master server 2900 that containsthe preferred embodiment 2800 and all software. Access points to themaster server 2900 are:

-   -   External access point 2902    -   E-mobility applications 144    -   Local access points 2904    -   BSC 118-A

In FIG. 29 the external access point 2902 are isolated from the masterserver 2900 by a hardware firewall. It then connects to a high speedInternet gateway 2906 and then to the worldwide wed (Internet) 2908.From this point, individual computers 2910 or devices are able to routecommands to the master server 2900 using this said connectivity.Additional external connectivity is allowed by use of a corporate LAN2912 being tied directly to the external access point 2902. This accessis NOT via any Internet connection, and is thus a secure connection.

E-mobility applications 144 may also access the system directly. Thee-mobility applications 144 system is tied into the BSC 118-A and switch130, and connects to the wireless devices 104 where the e-mobilityapplications 144 are interfaced by the user.

Shown in FIG. 29 is the local access point 2904 connection, whichconstitutes any local connection to the network. Of these types(external access 2902, e-mobility applications 144, local access point2904 and BSC 206) local access points 2904 this is the most secure. Thelocal access point 2904 connection is used for configuration and otheradministrative activity. Any available command for the said embodimentcan be executed here through a local connection.

Still referring to FIG. 29 a back-up system server 2914 is alsoinstalled and attached to the master server 2900. All data Isoftware/connections are mirrored using a redundant array ofindependent. disks (RAID) or similar method to add redundancy to protectthe operational ability of the said embodiment if the master server 2900were to fail.

The fourth type of connection, the BSC 118-A, is shown in its logicalconnection to the network. The BSC 118-A provides a means to access themaster server 2900 through the switch 130 and the publicly switchedtelephone network (PSTN) 138. The ability to access the master server215 through the BSC 118-A can allow for alternate connection meansincluding access from internet 3200 and remote sources connected to theBSC 118-A. The uses could include data exchange or remote operationalcommands.

Still referring to FIG. 29 is the data flow diagram 2916, whichillustrates the type of connections between the components of thenetwork. These connections include; data flow connections, local areanetwork (LAN) connections, intersystem logical connections.

Now referring to FIG. 30 is an illustration of the standardization andconversion hardware and software 906 that may be used to interface thesaid primary embodiments 2800 with hardware and software, which areexternal to the primary embodiments 2800. The standardization andconversion hardware and software 906 are an SISO (single input singleoutput) type control structure, where a single input results in a singleoutput. In this case, a command from one protocol is input, and thecorrect protocol for the receiving machine is sent (after beingconverted internally).

The flow of this process begins by a start command 3000 being sent tothe standardization and conversion hardware and software 906. Thestandardization and conversion hardware and software 906 checks theprotocol against known types using its internal protocol database 3004.If there is a match, and the protocol is recognized 3006, then it checksdevice attached 3008 and determines (or is pre-configured) theappropriate protocol by checking receive devices protocol 3010 from thereceive device protocol list 3012. it then determines if a conversioncan be made 3014. If it can convert the command, then it is converted3016. The command is then sent 3018 to the connected device 3020. Theconversion would end” 3022 at this point, and wait for another command.If any of the decision boxes (3006, 3014) are ‘no” then a ‘protocolerror” 3024 is recorded and the recorded “protocol error” 3024 is sendback to the sending source.

Still referring to FIG. 30 the standardization and conversion processoperates the same in either direction, from the source to destination orthe destination to the source. The standardization and conversionprocess is bidirectional.

Now referring to FIG. 31 is an illustration of the BSC access controlsoftware 2804. The BSC access control software 2804 is responsible fornegotiating a connection between the primary analytic software 2814 andthe BSC 118-A.

Still referring to FIG. 31, the execution of its internal operationsbegins when the primary analytic software 2814 sends a request 3100 tothe BSC 118-A. The BSC access control software 2804 then interrupts thestart-idle state 3102 that the BSC access control software 2804functions in when in idle mode. The BSC access control software 2804checks to see if there is a new request 3104 form the primary analyticsoftware 2814. If there was a new request, then the BSC access controlsoftware 2804 sends a command to receive the message 3106 from theprimary analytic software 2814. It then compares the command 3108 to acommand list 3110 of convertible commands (converting to BSC 118-Anative commands).

The next step is to check if the command is convertible 3112. If thecommand is convertible 3112, then the command is converted 3114 to theBSC 118-A native code (or protocol). The message (code) is then sent3116 to the BSC 118-A. The system then goes back into the start(idle-wait for response mode) 3102 waiting for a new command or areturned answer from the BSC 118A. If however, prior to step 3112 thecommand was not convertible, then a ‘command error” will be sent 3118 tothe primary analytic software 2814, and the system will return to thestart (idle-wait for response mode) 3102. In this case, steps 3114,3226, 206, 3102 are skipped.

Still referring to FIG. 32, if no new command from the primary analyticsoftware 2814 is received 3104, but a result from the BSC 206 isreturned 3118, then the reverse conversion process begins. The BSC 118-Anative code is converted into primary analytic software 2814 nativemessaging 3120. The message is then sent 3122 to the primary analyticsoftware 2814. If no result was received from the BSC 118-A, then thesystem would have returned to the start (idle-wait for response mode)3102. If a message was sent back 3122 to the primary analytic software2814. The system then also returns to the start (idle-wait for responsemode) 3102.

Now referring to FIG. 32, the user interface software 3200 isillustrated. The user interface software 3200 is responsible forinterfacing the user with the primary analytical software 2814 and othersubsystems. It allows a plurality of connections to be used asinterfaces:

-   -   Internet 3202    -   Intranet 3204    -   Other user defined objects 2848    -   Local server/workstation 3206

When these four types begin to negotiate 3210 with the user interfacesoftware 3200, all protocol and other pure connectivity issues areresolved by commonly known techniques, the standardization I conversionhardware I software 906, or through standard protocols. The first stepis for the user interface software 3200 to obtain the login information3212 from the user. The user interface software 3200 then compares theuser's login information 3214 against an encrypted database containingthe user list. The database containing this information is termed the“user database” 3216. If the user is not authenticated 3218, then thesession is terminated 3220. If the user is authenticated 3218, then theuser interface software 3200 begins to log the user's activities,including login information 3222 to the system log 3224.

Still referring to FIG. 32, the user interface software 3200 nowdetermines the access rights 3226 of the users and allows the user toaccess 3228 the primary analytics software's 2814 features that it isallowed to. The system monitors continually the user's activity 3230 forabnormal usage. If there is abnormal usage 3232 then a message is sentto the system administrator 3234 and the session is closed 3236. Ifthere was normal usage 3232 then the user may continue to access thesystem 3228.

Again referring to FIG. 32, the user interface software 3200 alsomonitors for the users activity duration and when the user has been idlefor more than a set time 3238 then the session is closed 3236. When theuser ends the session 3240 the system logs the normal closure of theconnection 3242 to the system log 3224 and closes the connection 3236.

Now referring to FIG. 33 is a description of the device locationsoftware 2808. This device location software 2808 package is used todetermine the location of a wireless device 104 connected to a wirelessnetwork 100/200 or other similar network to which a wireless device 104may be connected. The commands 3300 form the primary analytic software2814 to the device location software 2802 is a command to locate 3302 awireless device 104, as well as an identifier such as the phone number3304 of a wireless device 104. The device location software “starts”3306 and receives the phone number 3308 of the wireless device 104. Itthen checks the phone number to see if it is valid for tracking. If thenumber is invalid 3310, meaning the number is not valid for anytraceable device, an error message is sent 3312 to the primary analyticsoftware 2814 If the number is valid 3310, then the device locationsoftware 2802 first can query (if it is connected to) a ULD 900 for thelocation 3314. If the number and location is found 3316, then thelatitude/longitude of the device is retrieved 3318, and then a messageis sent 3320 with the latitude/longitude to the primary analyticsoftware 2814 and then finishes 3322.

Still referring to FIG. 33, if the number of the wireless device 104 wasnot found 3316 then it queries 3324 a similar device such as a ULDC 908.If the number of the wireless device 104 and latitude/longitude locationis found 3326, then the latitude/longitude of the wireless device 104 isretrieved 3318, and then sent 3320 to the primary analytic software 2814and then finishes 3322. If the wireless device 104 location is not found3326, then the device location software 2802 queries the BSC 118-A forlocation information 3328 including timing information on the number ofthe wireless device 104 including all radio tower sectors in use. Thedevice location software 2802 can then compute the latitude andlongitude directly 3330 from information derived from the BSC 118-A andradio tower latitude/longitude database 2824 by using calculationtechniques 3332. These calculation techniques include triangulation ofround trip delay (RTD) from network timing information, triangulationfrom the signal strength and other commonly known locations techniques.Referred to by this patent are location techniques disclosed in theProvisional Patent, U.S. Ser. No. 60/327,327 that was filed on Oct. 4,2001.

Still referring to FIG. 33, the location of the wireless device 104 mayalso be retrieved from the BSC 118-A if the wireless device 104 containsa global positioning system (GPS) that may transmit the wirelessdevice's latitude/longitude to the BSC 118-A via the “keep alive” signalor other signal from the wireless device 104. Alternatively the locationof the wireless device 104 can be determined at the wireless device 104using triangulation, or other location techniques. If the wirelessdevice 104 is equipped with a GPS unit, this would be the preferredlocation technique due to the GPS's inherent accuracy. Thelatitude/longitude of the device is returned, and then sent to theprimary analytic software 2814 and then finishes 3322.

Now referring to FIG. 34 is a diagram that illustrates methods, whichcan be chosen to track and isolate wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C,104-D on a radio tower network 108. These methods are used by the devicelocation software 2802. In a generic radio tower network 108, consistingof a plurality of radio towers with base-station transceiver subsystem(BTS)('s) 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E, there are three primaryways to track wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D. These threeways are to specify:

-   1. BTS    -   a. a single BTS (eg. 110-A, 110-B, etc)    -   b. a plurality of BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D, 110-E    -   c. all BTS's-   2. Sector    -   a. a sector on a BTS (eg. 3400-B or 3400-A)    -   b. a plurality of sectors on BTS's (eg. 3400-A, 3400-B, 3402-A,        3402-B) etc.)    -   c. All Sectors-   3. Wireless device    -   a. a specific wireless device (eg. 104-A or 104-B)    -   b. a plurality of wireless devices (eg. 104-A, 104-B, 104-C,        104-D)    -   c. All wireless devices

Still referring to FIG. 34, these tracking methods are initiated by theprimary analytic software 2814. The primary analytic software 2814chooses which method to use based on the user's choice which isinterfaced at the user input device (BSS manager or other) 126 andconsequently the fault monitoring software and other internalconfigurations.

Again referring to FIG. 34, examples of tracking would be if the primaryanalytic software 2814 instructed the device location software 2802 totrack wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D on radio tower and BTS110. The result returned would be wireless device 104-B, 104-C. If theprimary analytic software 2814 instructed the device location software2802 to track wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D on sector3400-B the result would be wireless device 104-A.

Now referring to FIG. 35-A describes the primary analytic software 2814.The process used by the primary analytic software “starts” 3000 byinitializing the primary analytic software/hardware 2814 along with theoperating system 3500. The primary analytic software 2814 then brings upa main menu 3502 for a user using the display software 2832. The usercan select:

-   Active mode-   Inactive mode-   Passive mode-   Display case file-   File management-   Exit program    Still referring to FIG. 35-A, if the user selects inactive mode 3504    then the system is placed in standby mode 3506 and then goes into an    idle state 3508. The primary analytic software 2814 then waits for    mouse movement or input action 3510. When this occurs (mouse or    input action) the system returns to the display menu 3502.

If the user selects the active mode 3512, then the system displays theactive mode menu 3516. The user is then prompted with a menu selectionfor the following:

-   Track a single wireless device-   Track a list of wireless devices-   Track wireless device by sector

Again referring to FIG. 35-A, if the user selects ‘track a singlewireless device 3518, then the user is prompted to enter an identifierfor the phone such as the number for a wireless device 3520. The user isthen prompted to selects a time period to track the wireless device3522. The primary analytic software 2814 then will record the data forthe given time on the wireless device 3528. The primary analyticsoftware 2814 utilizes the device location software 2802 to perform thisprocess. The primary analytic software 2814 then records the file to astorage medium and the user is prompted to rename file 3526. The user isthen prompted if they wish to continue tracking/track 3528 anotherwireless device. If the answer is yes 3528, the user is brought back tothe active menu 3530. If they chose no 3528, then the user is broughtback to the main menu 3536.

If the user is in the active mode 3512, they can also select to “track alist of wireless devices” 3536. If the user selects yes, they can enterthem into a plurality phone numbers of wireless devices 104-A 104-B,104-C, 104-D they wish to track 3538. The user then selects a timeperiod 3522 to track the wireless devices 104. The primary analyticsoftware 2814 then will record the data for the given time on thewireless device 3524. The primary analytic software 2814 uses the devicelocation software 2802 to record the data on the given time of thewireless device 104. It then records the file to a storage medium andthe user is prompted to rename the file 3526. The user is then promptedif they wish to continue tracking/track 3528 another wireless device104. If the answer is yes 3528, the user is brought back to the activemenu 3530. If they chose no 3528, then the user is brought back to themain menu 3532.

Still referring to FIG. 35-A, the user can also select to track wirelessdevices by sector(s) delineation (choosing sectors track on) 3540. Theuser is prompted to enter/select/choose a list of sector(s) to trackwireless devices on 3542. The user then selects a time period 3522 totrack the wireless devices. The primary analytic software 2814 then willrecord the data for the given time on the wireless devices 104 with theselected sectors being tracked 3524. The primary analytic software 2814utilizes the device location software 2802 to perform this process. Theprimary analytic software 2814 then records the file to a storage mediumand the user is prompted to rename the file 3526. The user is theprompted if they wish to continue tracking/track 3528 another wirelessdevice. If the answer is yes 3528, the user is brought back to theactive menu 3530. If they chose no 3528, then the user is brought backto the main menu 3532.

The user interface software 2826 is used to allow the user it interactwith the various processes of the primary analytic software.

FIG. 35-B

Now referring to FIG. 35-B, the user is prompted to select the passivemode at the main menu 3544. If the user selects the passive mode thenthe system displays the passive mode menu 3546 using the displaysoftware 2832. The user is prompted to enter the sector/BTS (or list) totrack in passive mode 3548. The primary analytic software 2814 then asksthe user to enter (if any) the ‘error criteria’ and if the auto-correctmode should be enabled 3550. The software then sends the information3552 to the fault monitoring software 2802. When a fault is detected3554, then the system creates a case file and prompts the user for aname (if none is entered then a default is used) 3556. The primaryanalytic software then sends 3558 the case file to the faultdiagnostics/correction software 2806.

If the user enables the ‘auto-correction mode’ then corrections arereceived 3560 from the fault diagnosis/correction software 2806. Thesecorrections, contained within the case file, are then sent 3562 to theBSC via the BSC access control software 2804. The user can then selectto hit the cancel key 3564 and go back to the main menu 3566, or not hitthe cancel key, go back to the passive mode menu 3568.

Still referring to FIG. 35-B, from the main menu, if the user selects to“display case files” 3570, the user is forwarded to FIG. 35-C, BOX 3572.If the user selects file management 3574, (via the user interfacesoftware 2826) from the main menu, then a list of case files in theuser's storage medium are displayed 3576 via the display software 2832.The user can select a plurality of case files 3578 via the userinterface software 2826. The user is then prompted to delete 3580selected case files. If the user selects to delete 3582 a chosen casefiles, the case files are deleted and returned 3584 to a display oflisted case files. If the user selects to rename 3586 chosen case files,the case files are renamed 3588 and the user is returned 3584 to thedisplay of stored case files. If the user selects 3586 to not “renamecase files”, the user is then prompted to “exit” the system 3588. If theuser selects to ‘exit” the system 3588, they are returned 3566 to themain menu. If the user does not choose to “exit” the system 3588, theuser is returned 3584 to the display which lists the stored case files.

Again referring to FIG. 35-B, the user can at any point select to “exitprogram” 3589, from the main menu, shut down the primary analyticsoftware 3590, and exit the program 3591.

Now referring to FIG. 35-C, the user can select from the main menu to“display case file”. The user is then prompted to select/enter a casefile name 3572 (via the user interface software 2826). Then the user isprompted to enter a list of criteria to display 3592 (via the userinterface software 2826). The case file criterion is then sent to thedisplay package 3593 which includes:

-   Correlated mapping software 2828-   Correlated lat/long information 2830-   Display software 2832

Still referring to FIG. 35-C, the primary analytic software 2814 thenwaits until the user information is displayed 3594 and the user exitsthe display package 3595. When the user is done with the display package3595, the user is asked if they want to modify the parameters displayed3596 (via the user interface software 2826). If the user chooses todisplay and edit parameters 3597, then the user is returned back toenter criteria to display 3598. If the user does not chose to displayand edit parameters 3599, then they are returned to the main menu (FIG.35-A, BOX 3502).

Now referring to FIG. 36 is a flow chart, which describes the monitoringsoftware. The monitoring software begins by receiving a “start” command3602 from the primary analytic software 2814, and a list of flaggedcriteria 3604 form the primary analytic software 2814. The monitoringsoftware then “starts” 3000 by monitoring 3606 the BSCII8-A for newmessages. The monitoring software does so by accessing the BSC 118-A. Ifno new message is received 3608, it continues to monitor the BSC for newmessages unless a software interrupt is called. If a new message isreceived from the BSC 3608, then the new message is compared 3606 to theflagged criteria list. If the new message 3610 is not in the flaggedcriteria list, then the monitoring software resumes looking for newmessages from the BSC 3606.

Still referring to FIG. 36, if the new message was in the flaggedcriteria list 3608, then the monitoring software extracts 3612 the“flagged criteria” information from the new message. The monitoringsoftware then decodes 3614 and encodes the flagged criteria data into acase file format. The monitoring software then creates 3616 a customizescase file based of the specific flagged criteria. The monitoringsoftware then sends 3618 the case file to the primary analytic software.Following the case file formatting process, the monitoring software thenresumes waiting for error messages in the flagged criteria list 3606.

Now referring to FIG. 37, this diagram illustrates the case filegeneration process and how a case file 2820 is organized. Informationincluded in case files, and encoded in any industry standard databaseformat includes:

-   Case file distinguisher (number) 3722-   Individual wireless device number 3724-   Individual wireless device location 3700-   Error codes of device 3704    -   Forward receive power 3704    -   Forward transmit power 3706    -   Ec/lo 3708    -   Neighbor list 3710    -   Messaging 3712    -   FER 3714    -   Other error codes 3716-   Service effecting factors 2822-   Radio tower latitude/longitude locations 2824-   Other user defined factors 3718

The actual case file 2820 is composed of a software database entry asshown. It would include ‘N’ number of entries for all wireless devices104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D being monitored as requested by the primaryanalytic software 2814.

Still referring to FIG. 37, the format of the industry standard databasecan be determined by a software engineer, but one approach may be to usethe logical format shown in case file 2820 illustrated herein. Tablecolumn labels referring to the above types of criteria are in the casefile 2820 structure. Any deviation or other structure can be consideredwithin the scope of this patent because this format is a less thancritical element of the patent.

Now referring to FIG. 38-A is a description of the faultdiagnosis/correction software 2806. The inputs 3800 which are past fromthe primary analytic software 2814, and utilized by the faultdiagnosis/correction software 2806 include case files 2820, requestcorrection command 3802, and protocol command exchange 3804. The faultdiagnosis/correction software 2806 then “starts” 3000 when the case file2820 is received 3806 and the protocol commands are exchanged 3808 fromthe primary analytic software 2814 and the fault diagnosis/correctionsoftware 2806. The case file 2820 is then parsed 3810 to extractinformation from the case file 2820. The case files 2820 data is thenseparated and sorted into defined (by input data) categories 3812 andeach error and related data is stored as database entries 3814 into thelocal error database 3816. The fault diagnosis/correction software 2806then ‘starts” to examine the error 3818. The fault diagnosis/correctionsoftware 2806 accesses 3820 the stored case files 2820 (stored in thelocal error database 3816) and creates an additional entry based on datafor 15 seconds (or a length of time determined by a network engineer fora particular configuration) prior to the error, including the followingdata:

-   Case file distinguisher (number) 3722-   Individual wireless device number 3724-   Individual wireless device location 3700-   Error codes of device 3720    -   Forward receive power 3704    -   Forward transmit power 3706    -   Ec/Ib 3708    -   Neighbor list 3710    -   Messaging 3712    -   FER 3714    -   Other error codes 3716-   Service effecting factors 2822-   Radio tower latitude/longitude locations 2824-   Other user defined factors 3718

Still referring to FIG. 38-A, the fault diagnosis/correction software2806 can now proceed to apply standard (common knowledge by engineers inthe field) techniques to detect and identify errors by type 3822. Thefault diagnosis/correction software 2806 determines data value trends3824 for data leading up until the error begins. The trend analysis isthen stored 3826 as a trend analysis database entry 3828.

Again referring to FIG. 38-A, the fault diagnosis/correction software2806 then examines 3830 the trend analysis database entry 3828 andcompares preliminary trend analysis criteria 3832 against patterns’ thatindicate error types and resolutions. These patterns are unique tonetworks, and should be programmed by network engineers for specificnetworks/setups. Default patterns are suggested by the embodiment ofthis patent in FIG. 38-B. These can be modified or appended and staywithin the scope of this patent's claims.

Now referring to FIG. 38-B, the resulting patterns/error resulting fromcalculations (as described in FIG. 38-A, BOX 3832) are compared 3836,3840, 3844, 3848, 3852 to defined error criteria. The resulting errorcode/pattern evaluation produces messages that are then sent back 3856to the primary analytic software 2814. If the auto-correction mode wasenabled by the user 3858, (correction requested) then the faultdiagnosis/correction software 2806 makes corrections based on the errorcodes/patterns. The shown default corrections are 3860, 3862, 3864,3866, 3868.

Still referring to FIG. 38-B, corrections that are a result of the faultdiagnosis/correction software's 2806 analysis are then sent 3870 to theprimary analytic software 2814 where they are processed. If nocorrection was requested 3858 (auto-correction mode is off), or if thereare no more errors 3872 in the local error database 3874, then the trendanalysis data 3828, stored error data 3878, is purged 3876. If there isanother error in the ‘local error database” 3872, then the faultdiagnosis/correction software 2806 returns to the “start” point 3000 ofthe error examination process 3884. If there are more errors 3872, thesystem returns back to the idle “start” point 3884 were the faultdiagnosis/correction software 2806 waits for new messages to be passedfrom the primary analytic software 2814.

Now referring to FIG. 38-C is a description of the default error table3878, message table 3886, and correction table 3888. These tables areused in FIG. 38-B as defaults for the fault diagnosis/correctionsoftware 2806. Additions and modifications can be made to these tables3878, 3886, 3888 and stay within the scope of this patent. These tables3878, 3886, 3888, can be customized depending on the configurations ofthe wireless network, hardware and software considerations, theparameters set by network engineers, or other considerations which wouldrequire customizing the configurations of these tables 3878, 3886, 3888.

Now referring to FIG. 39 is a description of the correlated mappingsoftware 2828 flow. Output 3900 methods supplied by the primary analyticsoftware 2814 include command to display an output 3902, raw data filewith network data (case file) 3904, and mapping element list 3906. Themapping element list 3906 contains all the elements (types of data) thatthe user wants to map.

The correlated mapping software 2828 now “starts” 3000 by checking ifthe case file is valid 3808. If the case file is not valid 3808, thecorrelated mapping software 2828 sends an error message to the primaryanalytic software 2814 and the display software 2832. If the case fileis valid 3908, the correlated mapping software 2828 reads an elementfrom the case file 3912. The correlated mapping software 2828 thenassigns a reference color code to the data element to be used later formapping 3914. The correlated mapping software 2828 then correlates thedata to latitude/longitude values where the data was recorded 3916, andstores the correlated data 3918 to a data layer 3920 in memory. If thisis not the last element in the case file 3922, then the correlatedmapping software 2828 returns to read a new element in the case file3912, and continues reading new elements until all elements have beenread 3922. When the last element has been processed 3922, the correlatedmapping software 2828 groups data layers into one file 3924, and storesall the file data to a 3926 master data layer 3920 file as a databaseentry.

Still referring to FIG. 39, the correlated mapping software 2828 thencalculates the most extreme west/east/north/south points in the datalayer 3928. The correlated mapping software 2828 then imports 3930 maps2810, 2812, 2824, 3956 based on these extremes. The correlated mappingsoftware 2828 then saves each of these new maps as an individual layer3932. The correlated mapping software 2828 follows by grouping thesemaps to one data file containing all the layers 3934 and stores them inthe master map layer 3936. Based on the requirements of the mappingelement list 3906, the correlated mapping software 2828 filters the casefile data and map layers 3938 so that the resulting data contains onlydata and map layers 3938 relevant to what needs to be mapped. Thefiltered data 3942 is saved to the filtered master data layer 3940 andfiltered mapping layers 3946 are saved to the filtered master mappinglayer 3944. Both the filtered data layer 3942 and the filtered mappinglayers 3946 are combined into the primary display layer data file 3950.The correlated mapping software 2828 records time and date of data andother configurable information and saved into a secondary data file3948. The primary display layer data file 3950 and the secondary datafile 3948 are then sent to the primary display software 3952. Thecorrelated mapping software 2828 now closes itself and purges temporarydata 3954.

Now referring to FIG. 40 is description of the display software'soperations. The display software's inputs 4000 are the primary displaylayer 4002, the secondary display layer 4004, and command/info passed tothe display software 2832 from the primary analytic software 2814. Thedisplay software 2832 “starts” 3000 by sending the primary display layer4002 and secondary display layers 4004 to two sub routines.

Still referring to FIG. 40, the primary display layer's 4002 subroutinebegins 4006 by reading data from the primary display layer 4002 datafile data file. The display software 2832 then checks if the output forthe user is defined as full screen 4008. If the output is a full screen4008, as defined in the set-up, the display software 2832 thencalculates dimensions for the screen size 4012/4016/4020 for full screenoperation. If the output is a “window” screen 4008, as defined in theset-up, the display software 2832 then calculates dimensions for thescreen size 4010/4014/4018 for the window screen operation. The displaysoftware 2832 then sends the results 4022 to commonly used/known mappingsoftware 2828. If this is not the last data layer 4024, the system readsthe next layer in 4006 and continues as before.

Again referring to FIG. 40, the secondary subroutine starts 3000 byreading data 4026 from the secondary data file. The display software2832 checks if the output is defined as full screen 4028. The displaysoftware 2832 then calculates dimensions for the screen size4032/4036/4040 for full screen operation. If the output is defined aswindow screen 4028, the display software 2832 then calculates dimensionsfor the window screen size 4030/4034/4038 for window screen operation.The display software 2832 sends the results 4024 to commonly used/knownmapping software 2828. If this is not the last secondary data layer, thesystem reads the next layer in 4006 and continues as before. After bothsubroutines are finished, the display software 2832 outputs the graphicdisplay to the screen 4046/4048 using commonly known techniques.

Now referring to FIG. 41 is a description of the final display outputformat. The final display has seven or more layers. These layers are:

-   Radio tower locations display layer 4100-   Wireless device locations display layer 4110    Service affecting factors (mapped to locations) display layer 4120-   Error codes (mapped to locations) display layer 4130-   Criss-cross phonebook entries (i.e. landmarks such as buildings)    display layer 4140-   Auxiliary object locations display layer 4150-   Geographic/topological street map overlay display layer 4160

The final display output is the sum of the above display layers. Aplurality of auxiliary object location display layers may be added bythe user via the user interface software. By doing so, the user mayexpand the mapping And display features of the resulting maps.

Still referring to FIG. 41, layer one 4100 is the location (latitude andlongitude) of all the radio towers and BTS's 110-A, 110-B, 110-C, 110-D,110-E in the radio tower and BTS network 108.

Layer two 4110 overlays the latitude/longitude of the wireless devices104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D (and the previous locations relative to time)of the wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D.

Layer three 4120 plots the service effecting factors in the case filebased on the recorded latitude and longitude where the factors 4121,4122, 4124, 4126, 4128 were recorded.

Layer four 4130 plots the error codes in the case file based on therecorded latitude and longitude where the factors 4132, 4134, 4136 wererecorded.

Layer five 4140 plots selected entries from the criss-cross phonebookdatabase with lat/long correlations. The displayed entries 4142, 4144and 4146 could represent such entries as, for example, hospitals, gasstations, restaurants, or a private residence.

Layer six 4150 plots auxiliary latllong correlations of userselected/inputted entities 4152, 4154, 4156.

Layer seven 4160 overlays a topographic map with road locations withcorrelated to their actual latitude and longitude locations.

Still referring to FIG. 41, the final display output 4170 is sent to theuser and shows all layers above combined together.

Alternative Embodiments

Now referring to FIG. 28, two alternative embodiments are containedwithin the current invention. The first alternative embodiment providesa means for providing a display screen machine and process, whichenables access to the current invention by other applications throughe-mobility services 144 or other interfaces. This alternative embodimentcould be used by other applications which have a need to display thegeographic location of wireless devices 104-A, 104-B, 104-C, 104-D,geographic location of entries contained with the crisscross phonebookdatabase 2812, maps of or other data contained within the geographicinformation database 2810, user selected auxiliary entries, or otherentries contained within the current invention 2800. The primaryelements required by this first alternative embodiment include:

-   Expansion to current embodiment to allow external queries to be    processed (e-mobility services 144)-   Alternative Embodiment Requirements    -   a BSC access control software 2804 and/or a user location        database 900 or user location database coordinator 908    -   Monitoring software 2802    -   Device location software 2808    -   Geographic information database 2810    -   Criss-cross phonebook with lat/long database 2812    -   Standardization/conversion hardware/software 906    -   Primary analytic software 2814    -   Internal CPU and computer 2816    -   Internal storage 2818    -   User interface software 2826    -   Correlated mapping software 2828    -   Correlated data for lat/long information 2830    -   Display software 2832    -   Inner system logical connection and other connections 132        The primary external queries will initiate from the e-mobility        services 144 of a wireless network 100. This implementation        greatly reduces the necessity for excessive amounts of        integration to occur.

E-mobility services 144 already in current wireless networks 100 haveaccess to the internet though certain firewall, LAN routing, and dataprotection schemes. This can be exploited by allowing external softwareto query, using a secure data connection via the internet, the saidfirst alternative embodiment. All calculations, and processing wouldoccur at the wireless networks server.

Access to this data would be limited by defined settings such as.

-   -   Viewable layers in final output        -   Topological data        -   Roadways        -   Location of wireless devices        -   Criss-cross phonebook data        -   Geographic information data        -   Other user defined data    -   Service affecting factors        -   Receive strength        -   Signal to noise ratio        -   Other user defined data    -   Location and or previous location of the wireless device        -   ULD database tracking        -   ULDC queries to track mobile        -   Other user defined data    -   Types of queries        -   Individual wireless device 104        -   Sector of BTS        -   BTS        -   Network        -   ULD 900        -   ULDC 908        -   Device location software 2802        -   Other user defined queries    -   Amount of time until processing occurs    -   Level of precision in latitude and longitude    -   Multiple query submission        -   Have a predefined list of criteria to be submitted at            regular intervals to the system        -   Have reports automatically generated and sent through            E-mobility applications 144 back to Internet user.    -   Ability to report System errors        -   Internet connected user can report false information            reported by the system.        -   Internet connected user can report missing information            reported by the system.        -   Other user defined objects 2848

External Connectivity of Preferred Embodiment

Now referring to FIG. 29, the physical realization of the preferredembodiment and the alternative embodiments is illustrated. Theseembodiments include a plurality of methods to develop case files andhence detailed information on users/conditions that exist on a wirelessnetwork 100. When these case files are generated they are stored on theserver—which is located at the switch (MTX or other) 130. This allowsrapid use of these case files for debugging and optimization.

The wireless network 100 can however be accessed from access pointsother than the switch 130. These locations are the corporate LAN 2912and the Internet 3202. Both connections offer secure connections.Examples of secure connections would be secure server language (SSL) andother similar connections.

Still referring to FIG. 29, the ability to access the switch (MIX orother) 130 from an external software package is integrated into thepreferred embodiments. These preferred embodiments allows a plurality ofsoftware packages to access the databases and primary analytic software2814 contained within these embodiments. These external softwarepackages can be assigned certain security allowances in addition toindividual user privileges. These restrictions would be able to limitsoftware packages that the wireless network 100 has not authorized tovarious levels of access.

An example of third-party I remote internet 3202 access programs couldbe a program that a wireless service provider uses to integrate billinginformation with communications (call, page, text message, etc.) logs.The wireless service provider could set up a location informationprogram that could be marketed to users as a way to access locationinformation regarding communications made on their wireless devices 104billing statement. This location information program could be accessedby users, allowing them to remotely access the preferred embodiments andinitiate a continuous tacking ability on the wireless device 104, whencommunications are made or at any other time. A user could also retrievelocation information from a web site on the Internet 3202 for anycommunication (call, page, text message, etc.) on his wireless devicebill, for example, thereby allowing the user to access a log of thegeographic location information correlated to the user's loggedcommunications. This would allow an employer to monitor the locations ofemployees at the time communication are sent and received.

Another example would be for a program issued to police or lawenforcement agencies to track a list, of a plurality of wireless devices104 that could be submitted over the Internet 3202. This list would getupdated at the switch (MTX or other) 130 in the users account and allowcase files to be generated on the list of wireless devices 104 the usersubmitted.

There are many possible ways to use this external connectivity option,however any use of its features would be considered within the realm ofthis patent's legal claims.

The primary elements (access of many options could be defined by accessrights of user/connection type) of this external connectivity would bethe following:

-   -   Ability to negotiate a secure connection via the internet        3202/corporate LAN 2912    -   Ability to authenticate software package and user    -   Ability to negotiate commands to create a new user account with        the preferred embodiment for the said new user. This account        would contain profile, preferences, and storage ability for case        files generated for the user.    -   Ability to send a list of wireless device identifications 3726        (phone #s, ESN's, etc) of mobile devices that would allow the        preferred embodiment to track these items.    -   Ability to set tracking modes for the list of identified mobiles        that are submitted to the said embodiment. These modes are:        Manual (one time tracking only) and automatic (track and record        mobile devices for a said period of time at any given interval.        These intervals can include time of day, time of call (when the        mobile makes a call), and default settings (every 24 hours).    -   The ability to submit criteria for tracking other than a unique        identifier phone a said wireless device 104. This can include:        -   Geographic criteria (track—create case files—for wireless            devices in a said geographic region.        -   Demographic criteria (track wireless devices of users of a            said demographic profile        -   Other customizable criteria    -   The ability to simply locate a wireless device 104 and return        its location ® The ability to view any saved case files in the        user home directory. This includes any manually developed case        files as well as case files automatically generated by the        user's profile settings—per prior request of the user. The        viewing of these said case files would be generated by the        preferred embodiments display software 2832 and could have        limitations placed n it by access rights. These access rights        could limit what layers are displayed on the output. Levels such        as network information, cellular tower location, etc could be        removed.    -   Ability to negotiate file maintenance on a user directory from        the remote connection is another option that could have        restrictions based on access levels. Maintenance commands could        include:        -   Delete file        -   Rename file        -   Copy file        -   Etc.    -   The ability to remotely submit case files manually for        auto-correction (user would require high access).

A specific concern that users would need to be aware of is the abilityof their records to be accessed by this system. Wireless devices 104should be able to submit preference flags that will control access tothe tracking and access of their accounts by the said embodiment.

The levels that could be defined for this type of preference are:

-   1. Open access—any party may access all information about user-   2. Limited access (Default option)—information such as the users    name, and other private information is masked. Demographic    information and the ability to anonymously track the mobile (ex:    tracking by demographic information).-   3. Polling access—No information is listed under the account,    however tracking can still occur but only by geographic region.    Results of the track would not include any information other than a    generic identifier for the phone-   4. No access—under this mode the user may not be tracked, but    certain features such as the ability for the user to track him/her    self will be disabled.

Ramifications and uses stemming from these access levels are beneficialto the wireless service providers. The wireless service provider canchoose to only allow certain levels to be used by a wireless customer.To this regard, under most circumstances they could make it mandatoryfor most wireless devices to be tracked.

This information is a very valuable commodity. Many applicationsstemming from this exist beyond the ability for third party applicationsto simply access, view case files, and setup tracking options.

Two specific claimed additional uses and processes would be:

-   -   Allowing marketing companies access to tracking based on their        target audience (demographic/geographic location/etc)    -   Traffic Analysis and route planning software

The first process would allow marketing or interestedorganization/persons to use software to access information about usersbased on customizable criteria. These criteria could be used to:

-   -   Send wireless messages to the wireless device 104 when it enters        a definable geographic region.    -   Research consumer habits based on the consumer's        profile/demographic information.    -   Allow unsolicited interaction with a customer based on a profile        set-up by a marketing company with the said process. (for        example, and out of town user receives a solicitation for a        discounted hotel rate as they enter town).    -   Allow a user to request solicitations for specified products or        services based on the users geographic location. (For example,        the user is at Broadway and V^(t) Ave. and wants to know which        restaurants in the area have a lunch special.    -   Receive a ‘wireless coupon” for wireless device users 102 on        user selected goods and services, based on the users geographic        location.        -   This “wireless coupon” would be realized by transiting the            user a coupon code, number or word, etc.,        -   By putting the user on a “wireless coupon” list comprising            the user names and/or wireless device phone numbers 3724.            This “wireless coupon” list is distributed to the service            provider's business.    -   Direct the user of the wireless device 104 to the closest        service such as a hospital, gas station or restaurant for        example.

Of concern to users would be the abuse of this technology. They would beable to block any such attempts by limiting their access rights in theirprofile, or by wireless providers reaching agreements with itsconsumers.

The second process is the ability for a directional assistance network(DAN) application to be developed that could analyze traffic patternsand determine alternate travel patterns that my offer a less congestedpath for a consumer while driving.

This DAN application would function by first querying the wirelessnetwork 100, ULD 900, ULDC 908, or other systems to track all wirelessdevices 104 in a traffic grid (the geographic criteria would includeroadways but not accessible—drivable land). It would then determinewhich devices are considered to be part of the traffic on a particularroadway.

Because the wireless devices 104 are being tracked by a case file, theycan be monitored for movement. If a device is in motion along a roadwaygrid for more than an allocated (a tunable) time, then it is consideredtraffic. When this has been calculated, all wireless devices 104 thatare not selected are considered to be non-traffic devices.

The system would now look at all moving devices and calculate fourattributes:

-   -   Average speed of all wireless devices on a given section of a        roadway    -   Density of wireless devices on the roadway    -   Peak/Min speed of all devices on a road way    -   Other programmable criteria

The system would access internal databases to obtain posted trafficspeeds on the various road segments. If the average speed is below theposted limit by a programmable amount, then it is deemed congested. Ifthe traffic density is also to dense for the roadway (indicating bumperto bumper) then the traffic density is defined as heavily congested.

Based on these criteria a traffic flow analysis can be done on theentire wireless network 100. Using the results a program can display toa user where traffic is bad/good in a visual display.

Users can enter into this software a starting location and a destinationlocation. Commonly used software packages are capable of finding simplesroutes. The standard method would first be used. If the resulting routehad a congested element on it, a change would need to be made for theuser.

The DAN application can then find the fastest route based on roadwaycongestion. It would tell the route finding software to recalculate aroute but NOT use the congested area. The resulting route would beanalyzed for congestion again and resubmitted, as before, if necessary.

The resulting information could easily be sent to the user via thewireless web as a message to their wireless device 104. The additionalprogramming need would be to interface with an e-mobility application144 that controls wireless messaging over the wireless web (forexample). The route would then be sent directly to the mobile device.

The user could also select for the route to be continually checked andupdates sent to the wireless device 104 until the feature is disabled(by the user reaching the destination) or the feature is timed out bythe user entering a time limit. The system knows the identification ofthe wireless device 104 of the user 102 and then could access theprimary embodiment to access the mobile location and travel directionand speed. It could then recalculate the routing information if the userof the wireless device 104 were to get off the primary route. Updatescould then be sent to the phone alerting of the change.

Second Alternative Embodiment; Customized Case File Generation

The second alternative embodiment comprised within the machine andprocess of the primary embodiments is a powerful feature for a consumerpoint of view, which allows the user to have external access to theprimary analytical software 2814. This access, as described in moredetail later, can take place from the Internet 3202, corporate LAN 2912and from a local computer at the switch (MTX or other) 130. This accessto the primary analytic software 2814 is through a secure connection,and allows the user access to stored case files, the ability to generatecustomized case files and for use of the primary access software.

A specific feature of the second alternative embodiment is its abilityto allow subprograms the ability to create customized case files. Thesecustomized case files contain monitoring data on the wireless network100 that allow a plurality of data analysis to be made on the network.This analysis takes place by the fault diagnosis and correction software2806. Additional analysis can be done by outside, third party, software.For this reason, special provisions in the preferred embodiments havebeen made to allow customizable case files to be generated. These customcase files better meet the needs and demands from consumers.

While in normal operation, case files are generated by subprograms aspart of their activities. For example, when the user selects the systemto monitor for faults and correct them (auto fault correction mode) thesystem generates case files and then submits them to the fault diagnosisand correction software 2806. In this instance the generation of thecase file is said to be autonomous.

Contrary to this method, case files can also be generated monitoring forspecific activities other than faults.

A second mode of generating case files is when the user chooses to havethe system create customized case files for specific criteria and simplysave the results to a local storage medium. This local medium is definedas part of the storage system that the primary analytic software 2814 isrunning on. The medium is allocated for storage and divided into userdirectories that can have information stored into by specific users. Auser has the option of looking for wireless network 100 variables otherthan just errors. The system is capable of recording data on the networkbased on several other criteria such as:

-   -   Single or plurality of said wireless devices based on phone #,        ESN, etc.    -   Specific sectors on BTS's.    -   Plurality of sectors on one or more BTS.    -   Time of day    -   Geographic criteria (track—create case files—for wireless        devices in a said geographic region)    -   Demographic criteria (track wireless devices of users of a said        demographic profile)    -   Other user defined criteria

The first of the customizable criterion is being able to locate devicesby a unique identifier that corresponds to the wireless device 104. Auser may submit a single, or plurality, of identifiers for wirelessdevices 104 to the preferred embodiment. The monitoring software 2826will then begin to monitor the network for activity by these devices.Activity can be defined as active calls, active data transfers, or anyother form of activity from the wireless device 104, which would allowtracking on its location to occur. The monitoring software 2802 uses theBSC access control software 2804 to acquire data on these devices andstores it to a local case file for the user's later review.

The next two tracking methods (other than for errors on the network) iswhen the user specifies specific or a plurality of sectors to track. Theprimary analytic software 2814 will again use the monitoring software2802 subprogram to monitor (using the BSC access control software 2904)the sectors that were specified. All data recorded on these sectors willbe stored to a case file 2820 that allows the user to retrieveinformation and perform data analysis by a third party program at alater time.

The next criteria can be used in conjunction with the above and belowcriterion for creating case files. The time parameter equals the amountof time for which monitoring should occur on any specified prerequisitecriteria. If a user asked for a specific sector to be tacked, the usercould then specify for how tong (if he didn't then the default timelimit—as defined in the software setup—would be used.

Two specialized formats that allow very precise consumer orientedpotential are case files 2820 being generated based on geographic anddemographic criteria. The first, geographic criteria, is specified by auser in 3 ways: latitude I longitude coordinates and boundaries;geographic criteria that can be chosen from the primary analyticsoftware's 2814 geographic information database 2810; or from predefinedsegments. The primary analytic software 2814 responds by translatingthese inputs into actual sectors that cover these areas. The monitoringsoftware 2802 as well as the device location software 2808 then read indata on active devices in these areas.

A further filter is then applied that removes devices not in thespecified geographic region by comparing their locations with thelocations acquired from the device location software 2808. The result isonly devices in the desired region will be recorded to the case file. Italso reduces computation power by only monitoring sectors that cover thegeographic region chosen by the user. All data recorded on thegeographic region will be stored to a case file that allows the user toretrieve information and perform data analysis by a third party programat a later time.

The demographic criterion selection is different, however, in that itcan use many of the above criteria to refine its monitoring pattern.Alone, the demographic criterion allows a user to specify demographicinformation on the user of wireless devise 104 on the network to track.This occurs by the user entering the demographic information and theprimary analytic software 2814 looking up corresponding users in itslocal user database. This local user database is derived from a customerprofile kept on record by the telecommunication company. Only relevantdemographic information can be stored here. Sensitive financialinformation is not copied here to prevent fraudulent misuse or abuse.The matches are then sent to the monitoring software 2802 to be trackedand recorded to a case file 2820. Refinements can be used by combiningthis be geographic tracking to limit the area of geographic interest.Time, sector, and other combinations can also be used.

The customizable ability for creating case files 2820 is a component ofthe preferred embodiment that would allow internal and external programsto generate analysis's that could be beneficial to consumer needs. Theseneeds could be to track a list of employee wireless devices 104 toprevent misuse. Another example is tracking people for targetedmarketing strategies.

An important use of case file generation is for non-visible fileoperations. In these operations, case files are generated for internalprograms and used as intermediate steps. When the case file is no longerneeded, it is deleted. Its classification would be as a temporary file.Subprograms that use these temporary case files are:

-   -   Monitoring software 2802    -   Display software 2832    -   Fault diagnostic and correction software 2806

The monitoring software 2802 continually creates temporary case files2820 for internal use. The reason this subprogram uses the temporarycase files is so it can capture events that contain errors and send themto the fault diagnostic and correction software 2806. This software,listed above, then parses the case file and discovers corrections thatcan be made to the network. Once the corrections are made, the case filecan be deleted. This type of internal operation is transparent to theend user, but critical to the normal operation of the primary preferredembodiment.

The display software 2832 also uses temporary case files when it isrequired to display certain information to the screen. It parses largercase files into smaller case files so specific information can beanalyzed, displayed, and outputted back to the system for furtherdiagnostics. The temporary case files are again transparent to anyuser's perception.

Specific examples of a case file being used by the display software 2832is if a user looks at a larger case file 2820 and then decides to onlydisplay certain information (time frame/geographic region/etc). The newdisplay creates a new smaller case file. If the user finds a problem, hecan submit the smaller case file for manual correction by the faultdiagnostic and correction software 2806. When this process is done, thetemporary case file is again deleted leaving the only original file.

Circumstances under which temporary case files are not deleted are whena system administrator sets the system to retain these files fordebugging or for validation reasons. Modifications to the network by thefault diagnostic and correction software 2806 may need to be checked byengineers after the system makes changes. In this case, retention of thetemporary case files is critical.

Manual deletion, or time marked deletion (delete temp files older than acertain age) is also possible by setting customizable configurationoptions.

These listed uses of case files are in no way limiting to the scope ofthis claimed patent. Derivations and extensions of these ideas arecompletely within the scope of this patent, and in no way exceed thespirit in which the herein claimed embodiment is expressed.

Pro-Active Tuning of a Wireless Device Network

Where the primary embodiment of the said patent refers to analyzing thewireless network 100 for errors and then the resulting said processes,there exists the ability for the Network Tuning System (NTS) 2800 totake a pro-active role in network tuning. To allow this possibility tooccur, the network must be able to support additional overheadprocessing. The pro-active tuning requires that the physical hardwareused to run the MTX 130 will have enough processing clock cycles andavailable RAM and storage stage to accommodate this addition. Asprocessing ability various by MTX 130 design and original provisioningof resources, it is simply stated that the resources will have to beadded if they cannot be repositioned from the current architecture.

The NTS 2800 primary role is to monitor a plurality of sectors orclusters (group of geographically close sectors) for load bearingfactors. As a wireless network increases its user load, or due to manyother factors, optimum performance is often not obtained. The increaseduser load can often result in loss of coverage for wireless subscribers.Using the ULD 900 to locate wireless devices and then analyzing networkparameters; the pro-active approach allows the NTS 2800 to compensatefor various factors the influence network performance.

Network engineers currently using current industry methods can onlydesign one configuration, which runs until a problem is encountered. Atthat point, the NTS 2800 could make changes or the network engineercould make modifications based on the network tuning systems reporteddata and/or recommendations.

Network Factors

Factors that can cause the network to perform poorly can occur forvarying reasons, and at varying times. The results are the same however,that the perceived Quality of Service, or QoS, is reduced for the user.The primary factors are:

-   Thermal interference-   Active Wireless Unit Density-   Terrain Interference-   Network Equipment Performance

Thermal Interference

Thermal interference causes Radio Frequency (RF) interference in the RFbands used by wireless subscribers of wireless networks. The core resultis that the range a wireless device 104 (cellular phone for example) ona radio tower and BTS network 108 may transmit is reduced significantly.The reduction occurs because the receiver cannot recover the signal inthe presence of the thermal noise.

The significance of the noise is that is causes the affective range of aradio tower and BTS network 108 coverage to be reduced. Based on thelevel of solar activity by the sun this can vary during the daylighthours. The amount of direct daylight is closely proportional to thelevel of thermal interference causing the strongest periods to be atmid-day and the weakest and sunrise and sunset.

The direct daylight causes the affective area of wireless coverage tovary as the time of day does. Secondly, at nighttime when thermalinterference is less; signals can be received/transmitted at muchgreater lengths. At nighttime the wireless coverage becomes larger thanduring daylight hours. The primary goal by the pro-active ability of theNTS 2800 is to reduce or eliminate coverage loss due to shrinking radiotower and BTS network 108 coverage area. A secondary goal is to reducethe cross-interference of radio tower and BTS networks 108 when thermalnoise is less.

Active Wireless Unit Density

Another factor in network coverage is active wireless unit density.Active wireless unit density primarily concerns CMDN/CDMA2000 and otherspread spectrum technologies, but has minor implications in technologiessuch as TDMA, GSM, and other frequency division protocols. The reasonthat the factor is more affecting to spread spectrum protocols is thatdue to the fact that users share the same bandwidth, RF activity byindividual users are seen as interference to others. The wirelessdensity causes the noise floor to rise and results in a similarsituation as in the thermal noise case.

Technologies such as frequency division typically use guard bands toprevent intra-cluster interference from happening to users in closegeographic proximity. There can still be a problem though when frequencyreuse levels allow users in relatively close geographic proximity tointerfere with each other RF signals.

The typical case would be to consider a sector of a CDMA network. (Note,that this is a real situation using hypothetical numbers that closelyapproximate actual performance) With only one user, a radio tower andBTS network 108 can send and receive signals to a wireless device 104 ata range of 10 km. When a second user in close proximity to the firstuser and in the coverage of the radio tower and BTS network 108 becomesactive, the second user begins to interfere with the wireless device'sability to recover signals from the radio tower and BTS network 108. TheEc/lo reduces from the wireless devices perspective.

As more wireless devices become active, the Echo for each device reducesuntil the receiver in the wireless device reaches its detectionthreshold. At this point the wireless device can no longer receive asignal from the tower. The wireless device must move geographicallycloser to the radio tower and BTS network 108 to receive the signal. Thetrend tends to decrease coverage for all wireless devices on the sector.

Typical network planning allows for sector coverage overlap and preventscoverage gaps under ideal conditions. When highly dense areas ofwireless phones are active, however, coverage may reduce to the pointthat the typical overlap is no longer present. The high density resultsin coverage gaps, and loss of wireless device service in the affectedareas.

Terrain Interference

Terrain Interference is a factor that can be caused by either manmade ornatural terrain objects. Man made objects can include:

-   New Buildings-   Power Lines-   Artificial Manipulation of natural terrain (cement)-   Other man made objects    Natural terrain interference can be caused by the following factors:-   Foliage Density-   New Foliage-   Leaf Attenuation (density of leafs on Foliage)—Seasonal-   Bodies of Water (water level, location, etc)-   Rain-   Snow

Both natural and manmade factors tend to simply impede RE propagationand cause signal loss. The factors result in radio tower and BTS network108 coverage that can vary in size. The affect of this is much moregradual than that of active wireless unit density with respect to time.

Network Equipment Performance

Network equipment performance inaccuracies are often the case forproblems to go unnoticed by a network engineer. The system may be set tohave a radio tower and BTS network 108 transmit at a particular powerlevel, but in fact will not. The network equipment performanceinaccuracies cause the actual field performance not to follow computermodels.

The performance can be seen by evaluation of the sector as itcommunicates to users. Using the location of users from the ULD 900 thesystem can determine if the appropriate sectors are communicating withthe device. If the incorrect sectors are communicating the transmitlevel and/or orientation should be changed on the radio tower and BTSnetwork 108 to correct for the field inaccuracies in the equipment.

Network Compensation Techniques

To compensate for performance factors, the system dynamically adjuststhe configuration of the network. The transmit power, intensity, orother transmit measure must be able to be adjusted from the MTX 130, tomake the required changes. The system then can vary the performancedynamically, thus altering RF coverage properties of the network tocompensate for the less than optimal network performance.

An additional adjustable factor that is not required but is useful whencorrecting network hardware performance issues is a variable orientationcontrol for radio tower and BTS network 108 sectors. The variableorientation control would however require additional hardware to beinstalled to allow remote orientation control of radio tower and BTSnetwork 108.

Thermal Noise

Thermal noise in most cases affects all sectors of a wireless devicenetwork relatively equally. The exception is when antennas and hardwareon the sectors are exposed to varying amounts of sunlight due tomounting design or location (in a shadow, etc).

The coverage area must be broken into sectors. Computer simulationsestablish the coverage zone for each sector using ideal factors. FIG. 48describes the process for each sector. Each sector undertakes thefollowing process. To adjust for thermal noise interference, the systemmust first establish the location of all active wireless devices in thepredicted coverage zone for a sector 4800. When the NTS 2800 obtains thelocation for each device from the ULDIULDC 900/908 or other method, theNTS 2800 records all send and receive powers all devices communicatingwith the sector via the BSC 300, BOX 4805.

The measurements are used as follows. The wireless device will transmitat a particular level and report its transmittal strength and/or Ec/lo4810. The radio tower and BTS network 108 receives the signal from thedevices and receives and calculates the normalized Ec/lo for the entiresector 4815.

The network engineer establishes a typical free space loss per unitdistance and establishes a minimal Ec/Lo value for the entire sector.The minimum value can be an included item in the configuration file sothe free space loss per unit distance is available to the software. Toestablish a minimum value for loss, nighttime measurements would beideal. The NTS 2800 compares the normalized sector base loss with theminimum loss value. The resulting number indicates the amount of noiseaffecting the signal 4820. To insure that the noise is mainly due tothermal conditions, the system can also mathematically remove the addednoise by other devices by subtracting the power levels at the distancefrom the secondary device to the primary devices. The system thenincreases Ec/lo levels to a ratio that compensates for the reduction dueto thermal noise. In other words, calculate the amount of reduction inEc/lo due to thermal noise, and then increase the transmit power of thesector until it has increased the Ec/lo values to target levels. Theincrease should be such that the Ec (energy per chip) increases theratio back to the base level.

If the recorded Ec/lo value of the system is above the normal level bygreater than 10dB when the above calculations are done 4825, the systemshould reset the transmit power level to its default value and thenresample the sector to attempt to get the Ec/lo to be at a level thatcompensates for thermal noise 4830. If the Ec/Lo value is less than 10dB above the minimum value 4825, the NTS 2800 repeats the process forthe next sector 4850. If the Ec/lo level is less then the minimum valueto maintain coverage, the system should increase the transmit power bysome small unit 4835. If the Ec/lo level is 8 dB above the minimum level4840, the NTS sends an error message to the network engineer 4845. TheNTS then repeats the process for the next sector 4850. If the Ec/lolevel is 8 dB below the minimum level 4840, the NTS repeats the processfor the same sector 4800.

Active Wireless Unit Density

FIG. 49 displays the process to tune a wireless network using the activewireless unit density. To tune the wireless network by active wirelessunit density, the NTS 2800 breaks up the coverage area into grids. Anexample of a grid layout is presented in FIG. 43. The number of zoneswill be determined by the size of the network and the size of each zone.Each zone should be in the range of 0.05-0.25 square-km in size. Thezones are analyzed one at a time; say zone ‘n’ of “m’ total zones.

To compensate for active wireless unit density, the network must firstdetermine the location of all the mobile units in a particular area4905. To get the location of all the wireless devices, the system cansubmit the coordinates of the zone to the device location software 2808of the NTS 2800 that queues the ULD 900 for the location of the devicesin the sector. It may also retrieve location results via GPS informationor direct query of the BSC/MTX 118-A/130.

When the location has been determined for the wireless devices, thesystem then determines other sectors currently communicating with thewireless devices. Because QoS is the primary goal and wireless densityis a very rapidly changing factor, the Packet loss, Bit Error Rate(BER), or Frame Error Rate (FER) are good standards for measuring theQoS for users. A general practice is that above 2% on any of theseparameters is unacceptable for users. A network engineer could howeverchoose the value of this percentage at their discretion for any networkconfiguration.

The NTS 2800 checks if the average density of wireless devices is lessthan 10 units per 0.1 km² 4910. If the average density is less than 10units per 0.1 km², the NTS 2800 repeats the active wireless unit densitytuning process for the next zone 4915. If the average density is greaterthan 10 units per 0.1 km², the BER/FER/Packet Loss value is calculatedfor each wireless device in the zone 4920.

The NTS 2800 determines if of the users are experiencing BER, FER, etcof over the threshold limit 4925. Commonly published studies have shownthat if 50% of users with a wireless transmit density of 10 wirelessunits per 0.1 sq km are experiencing error rates greater than 2-20% thanthey are with a 75-90% likelihood interfering with each other andreducing QOS and coverage. FIG. 44 shows a typical layout in a wirelessnetwork with 3 sector BTS's. Zones B and D have greater than 50% of theactive units transmitting with greater than 2-20% BER/FER. QoS is thebest measure of network perceived usability and these factors (BER, etc)are used as a gauge by this embodiment to prevent coverage gaps.

Next, the NTS 2800 determines which sector has the largest percentage ofusers in the zone 4930 and increases the transmit power of the BTS 108by one unit 4935. A typical power increase increment would be 1-10 dBmWfor the transmit strength. The system then checks the geographicallyadjacent sectors and makes sure that the unique users on those sectorsare not affected by the change (no increase in BER and other determiningfactors) 4940. If adjacent sectors are interfered with, the NTS 2800sends an error message to the network engineer 4950 and the NTS 2800processes the next zone 4915. If adjacent sectors are not interferedwith, the NTS 2800 checks if the maximum transmit power is reached 4945.

The maximum level prevents ‘overshoot’, which is when a sector willproject its RF inadvertently into distant sectors coverage. A typicallimit could be in the range of 5 dBmW to 100dBmW. If the transmit powerhas not reached the maximum level 4945, the NTS 2800 repeats the processstarting with recording the BER/FER/Packet Loss 4920. The system willthen continue to increase transmit power until the percentage of usersfailing the 2-20% criteria has either been reduced to below thedesignated level 50% in spot areas (or another network-engineerprescribed level) or the increase causes an increase in the BER ofadjoining sectors polled. If the maximum level is reached, the systemsends a report to the network engineer 4950. The NTS 2800 then analyzesthe next zone 4915.

The technique should be done on every zone in the network. The frequencyof the polling and resulting adjustments should be fast, so as stated,adequate processing ability should exist.

Terrain Interference

Terrain interference has in some cases limited recoverability in networkperformance by the pro-active system. In most cases the obstructioncannot be overcome by parameter modifications. To begin the systemshould query the ULD 900 for the location all wireless devices in the‘theoretical’ zone of coverage for a sector 5005. This ‘theoretical’zone consists of a predefined geographic area that network engineersexpect full coverage from for any giver sector on a radio tower and BTSnetwork 108. Such geographic zones are usually determined during initialnetwork provisioning and are updated when physical changes in RFequipment are made.

A list of all the sectors that all wireless devices in the theoreticalzone are communicating with are listed. Devices that are communicatingwith the sector being diagnosed are kept in a list (or database entry,file, etc). A list of these sectors, for naming purposes it is calledlist one, is made for diagnosis. The devices in list one consist of alldevices that are both in the theoretical zone and communicating with thesector being diagnosed 5010. A second list, for naming purposes listtwo, should be created that contains all devices in the theoretical zonethat are not talking to the sector being diagnosed 5015. Basicinterpretation of list two will show all the devices that cannotcommunicate with the sector being diagnosed. With the exception ofsoftware errors, the primary reason is lack of RF coverage from thesector. Software errors can be ruled out by the network tuning system orby a qualified RF engineer using commonly known techniques in the field.

The performance evaluation should be done in zones 5020. The zones canbe defined by percentages of distance from the radio tower and BTSnetwork 108 to the theoretical ending of coverage for the sector FIG.45. Another defining range could be in units of distance, for examplemeter, miles, feet, etc. There can be an arbitrary number of zones inthe system. Further expansion of this method that would only needadditional software programming, and does not take away from the noveltyof this design, would be to add additional zones in a radial patternfrom the radio tower and BTS network 108 in FIG. 46. A radial patternallows multiple zones at the same distance from the radio tower and BTSnetwork 108. Examples of zones in a 4-zone non-radial divided systemare:

-   Zone 1—0%-25% distance from Sector-   Zone 2—25%-50% distance from Sector-   Zone 3—50%-75% distance from Sector-   Zone 4—75%-100% distance from Sector

The zones should be scanned starting from 1 to 4. For a radial dividedsystem, the sub zones should be examined from one radial side to theother, in a sweeping direction that repeats in the same direction foreach zone. The scanning should examine list one. List two does not needto be examined because devices are not talking to the sector and wouldwaste both time and resources.

For each zone a calculation of the percentage of devices in list oneversus the over all devices in list one and two for each sector shouldbe made 5025. If less than 50-80% of the devices in a zone (or sub-grid)are communicating with the radio tower and BTS network 108 sector thenan obstruction may exist 5030. Each sub-grid is flagged either bad orgood depending on the communications of the devices in the zone 5035,5040. In most cases, the problem areas will result at the extreme edgesof the theoretical zone. A second calculation should then be made tocalculate the overall coverage of this sector 5045. The best method isto first disregard all zones on the edges (border zones) of thetheoretical coverage FIG. 47. The disregard of border zones is mostappropriate in radial divided zoning displayed in FIG. 46.

With the zones disregarded, the percentage of zones that failed thefirst criteria (less than 50-80% of the devices in a zone (or sub-zone)are communicating with the radio tower and BTS network 108 sector)should be calculated 5045. If over 1-20% failed than the system then canattempt to increase transmit power to compensate for this problem 5050.The power is increased one unit level at a time (as listed in theconfiguration file). The NTS 2800 checks the power against adjacentsectors as it was with the wireless density factor resolution process asdescribed in this embodiment 5055. If the wireless density causesinterference with an adjacent sector, the NTS 2800 reduces the level byone unit 5060, sends an error message to the network engineer 5075 andthen moves to analyze the next sector 5080. If there is not interferencewith adjacent sectors 5055 and the maximum power is not reached 5065,the NTS 2800 reanalyzes the zones 5070. The power should be increaseduntil less than 20% of zones in the fail the second calculation (over1-20% failed) or until a threshold limit is reached on transmit power5065. If a limit is reached an error message is sent to the networkengineer 5075.

The technique should be done on every sector in the network. Thefrequency of the polling and resulting adjustments should be fast, so asstated, adequate processing ability should exist

Network Equipment Performance

The network equipment performance of a network can be evaluated bycomparing simulated results to actual numbers. FIG. 51 displays theprocess to analyze a wireless network using network equipmentperformance. The NTS 2800 queries the location of all devices on thetheoretical coverage of a sector (say sector “n’ of “rn’ total sectorsin the network) from a ULD 900 and then the received powers (relative towireless device) are recorded 5105.

The figures are compared against theoretical numbers for the antennaarrays and their power relative to the locations for wireless unitscommunicating to the hardware. If the measured power levels (receivelevel) are to off by +/−20% (compared to theoretical predicted valuesfor the current transmit power) for 80% of the devices then the networkequipment is most often the cause 5110. If the receive level is to high5115, the NTS 2800 decreases the transmit power by one unit 5125. TheNTS 2800 then checks if the minimum power level has been reached 5140.If the minimum level has not been reached, the NTS 2800 checks forinterference with adjacent sectors 5145. If there is no interference,the NTS 2800 repeats the process again for the same sector 5132. If theminimum power level is reached 5140, or there is interference withadjacent sectors 5145, the NTS 2800 sends an error message to thenetwork engineer 5155, and repeats the process for the next sector 5160.

If the receive level is too low, the NTS 2800 increases the transmitpower by one unit 5120. The NTS 2800 then checks if the maximum powerlevel has been reached 5135. If the maximum level has not been reached,the NTS 2800 checks for interference with adjacent sectors 5150. Ifthere is no interference, the NTS 2800 repeats the process again for thesame sector 5132. If the maximum power level is reached 5135, or thereis interference with adjacent sectors 5150, the NTS 2800 decreases thetransmit power by one unit 5130, sends an error message to the networkengineer 5155, and repeats the process for the next sector 5160.

Implementation with Network Tuning System

Implementation using the Network Tuning System requires individualcomponents to perform special functions to accommodate the addedfunctionality of the pro-active monitoring features. The additionalfeatures add to the ability of the tuning software allowing it to bothcorrect faults in the system reactively but also proactively monitor andoptimize the network to reduce the faults from occurring in the firstplace.

As stated, the pro-active software 4200 can access the components of thenetwork tuning system 2800. The primary analytic software 2814 on theNTS 2800 will run the pro-active software 4200 as an additionalsubroutine FIG. 42 and integrate pro-active software 4200 with itsnative components. The proactive software 4200 can integrate into theNTS 2800 native software structure. The below components of the NTS 2800are described in regards to their interaction with the pro-activesoftware 4200 and any modifications necessary to allow the NTS 2800 andpro-active software 4200 to integrate seamlessly. The NTS 2800 referencenumbers refer to the NTS FIG. 28.

Monitoring Software (2802)

The monitoring software 2802 in the NTS 2800 is responsible formonitoring the network for error codes generated that indicate irregularnetwork problems and or other indications. The monitoring software 2802intercepts and decodes error codes produced by the BSC 118-A andinterprets their effects on the wireless device. If the error is serviceaffecting then the fault is sent to the primary analytic software 2814.

To modify the monitoring software 2802 to allow integration of theproactive system, the monitoring software 2802 should monitor formessaging other than just ‘error-codes’. The system needs to monitor fornetwork messaging on individual sectors and clusters of sectors. Theprimary analytic software 2814 sends a request to the monitoringsoftware 2802 for the network parameters of a single or plurality ofsectors. The typical parameters gathered by the monitoring software 2802and returned to the primary analytic software 2814 for these ‘new’ typesof queries are:

-   Echo Forward Link Statistics for active connections-   Ec/lo Reverse Link Statistics for active connections-   Receive Power Forward Link Statistics for active connections-   Receive Power Reverse Link Statistics for active connections-   Reverse Link Transmit Power Statistics for active connections-   Forward Link BER/FER Statistics for active connections-   Reverse Link BER/FER Statistics for active connections-   Reference List of Mobile Identifiers for all Mobile Devices on    Sector(s)-   Other User Defined Variables

BSC Access Control Software (2804)

The base station controller (BSC) access control software 2804 isresponsible for interfacing the components and processes of the currentinvention with the BSC 118-A of a wireless network. The BSC 118-Acontains all the call information as well as all the information onnetwork faults. It should be noted that some wireless network designshave the network fault information stored elsewhere, and that the BSCaccess control software 2804 could be used to access that information atany other location also. The BSC access control software 2804 interactsdirectly with the BSC 118-A and the primary analytic software 2814 aswell as the monitoring software 2804.

The monitoring software 2804 specifically uses the BSC access controlsoftware 2804 to retrieve network statistics such as Echo and ReceivePowers from the BTS/Sectors(s) for pro-active queries of the pro-activesoftware 4200.

Fault Diagnosis and Correction Software (2806)

The fault diagnosis and correction software 2806 is typicallyresponsible for obtaining case files from the primary analytic software2814 and generating a solutions and implementing changes to the networkto resolve the problem. The modifications necessary to accommodate thepro-active software 4200 are a new set of protocols that are defined forpro-active network monitoring. The protocols are specifically designedto address the four issues: Thermal Interference, Active Wireless UnitDensity, Terrain Interference, and Network Equipment Performance. Theprotocols as described in the ‘Network Compensation’ section allow thefault diagnosis and correction software 2806 to react to case files thatcontain the pro-active data and make appropriate changes to the network,as it would do for reactive ‘fault’ case files.

Device Location Software (2808)

The device location software 2808 is the package that when activated bythe primary analytic software 2814 is able to retrieve information froma database such as a ULD 900, or a ULDC 908, that holds geographicinformation (as well as time, date of the acquired geographicinformation). Additionally, as an alternative embodiment this devicelocation software 2808 can directly query the BSC 118-A and calculatethe location of a wireless device 104, as instructed by the primaryanalytic software 2814. The device location software 2808 interactsdirectly with the BSC 118-A, the primary analytic software 2814, theUser Location Database 900 and/or User Location Database Coordinator1600.

To modify the device location software 2808 to allow integration of theproactive software's 4200 new features only limited changes must bemade. The first change is that the queries from the primary analyticsoftware 2814 must be given a higher priority than normal queries whenthey regard pro-active monitoring. When the primary analytic software2814 queries the monitoring software 2802 for the network statistics ofa single of plurality of sectors, the primary analytic software 2814receives a list of wireless identifiers. The primary analytic software2814 then immediately queries the device location software 2808 for thelocation of the said devices returned from the monitoring software 2802.

To allow for the location to be as synchronized to the data from thesectors, the location should be retrieved quickly. In this case, andmessages queued with lower priorities should be bypassed and thesequeries should be processed first. In practice, the pro-active locationqueries should only be superceded by manual location submissions (oroverrides by an administrator).

User Location Database Coordinator (1600)

No modifications to the User Location Database Coordinator (ULDC) 908 orsimilar software/hardware and necessary because it is simply used as anintermediary to resolve the location of mobile devices.

User Location Database (900)

No modifications to the User Location Database (ULD) 900 or similarsoftware/hardware and necessary because it is simply used as an resourceto obtain the location of mobile devices.

Geographic Information Database (2810)

No modifications to the geographic information database 2810 or similarsoftware/hardware and necessary because it is simply used as an resourceto obtain the mapping information that is not specifically needed forthe pro-active software 4200 to operate.

Case Files with Lat/Long Correlations (2820)

Case files are typically created to contain-the appropriate informationfor reactive diagnostics for the fault diagnosis and correction software2806. For the case of a pro-active diagnostic to be performed by thefault diagnosis and correction software 2806, a modified version of thestandard case file must be submitted.

The modifications to the standard case only need to include anadditional database field indicating pro-active or reactive case filestype. Having this field allows the fault diagnosis and correctionsoftware 2806 to determine what diagnostic protocols to use to analyzethe case file. In the case of the pro-active field being marked, thesystem would use the new protocols listed in the ‘Network CompensationTechniques’ section.

Radio Tower Lat/Long Correlations (2824)

No modifications to the radio tower lat/long correlations 2824 orsimilar software/database entries and necessary because it is simplyused as a resource to obtain the mapping and analytical iQformatiorl.Its uses are the same in the new configuration that includes thepro-active software 4200.

Internal Memory Storage (2818)

Additional memory should be added to allow the pro-active software 4200to function with additional overhead and not require hard disk cachingof data. The amount may vary by final software implementation andnetwork hardware design. Software engineers using standard provisioningtechniques should determine the final amount of additional memory.

Internal Central Processing Unit and Computer (2816)

Additional CPU processing power should be added to allow the pro-activesoftware 4200 to function with additional overhead clock cycles and notencounter CPU maximum utilization at peak operating conditions. Theamount of additional processing ability may vary by final softwareimplementation and network hardware design. Software engineers usingstandard provisioning techniques should determine the final amount ofadditional processor ability.

User Interface Software (2826)

The modifications to the user interface software 2826 are simply to addadditional menu systems to the software to allow integration with thepro-active software 4200. The following commands should be available forthe user and be displayed by the display software for the user. Theorder and menu placement is suggested to be as follows:

Main Menu Item: Pro-Active Features

<Pro-Active Features>

-   -   Thermal Interference        -   Configure Thermal Interference        -   Activate/Deactivate Thermal Interference        -   Exit Thermal Interference    -   Active Wireless Unit Density        -   Configure Active Wireless Unit Density        -   Activate/Deactivate Active Wireless Unit Density        -   Exit Active Wireless Unit Density    -   Terrain Interference        -   Configure Terrain interference        -   Activate/Deactivate Terrain Interference        -   Exit Terrain Interference    -   Network Equipment Performance        -   Configure Network Equipment Performance        -   Activate/Deactivate Network Equipment Performance        -   Exit Network Equipment Performance Exit Pro-Active Menu

In the manual verification mode any changes will not occur until anetwork engineer verifies the change. A list of suggested changes andthe case file that is created will be sent to engineers as the changesare created. In auto correction mode all changes will be madeimmediately. To reduce any system catastrophes network wide changes arelimited to certain tolerances in the diagnostic protocols to eliminatenetwork instability issues.

Correlating Mapping Software (2828)

No modification to the correlated mapping software 2828 or similarsoftware/hardware is necessary because it is not specifically needed forthe proactive software to operate.

Correlating Data For Lat/Long Information (2830)

No modification to the correlated data for Iat'long information 2830 orsimilar software/database entry(s) is necessary because its uses are thesame in the new configuration that includes the pro-active software4200.

Display Software (2832)

The display software 2832 does not need modified because it is used inthe same way when the pro-active software is integrated.

Primary Analytic Software (2814)

The primary analytic software 2814 is the controlling software of theNTS and integrates all the elements into a single software package for auser. From the software, a user may access all features of the systemand run either active, passive, or inactive modes. The pro-active system4200 can integrate in the primary analytic software 2814 in the activeand passive modes. However, many features can only be available in theactive mode due to the real-time requirements for some pro-active tuningfeatures. Passive mode will always prompt the network engineer beforemaking changes and therefore is unrealistic for most pro-activefeatures.

All features are available in the active mode while only the terrain andnetwork features are available in the passive mode. The specific reasonis listed below for each feature.

Thermal Interference—The ability for the system to react to thermalinterference requires a CASE file to be generated frequently to recordnetwork performance factors that indicate thermal interference. Atypical interval will be at 10-30 minute intervals. The primary analyticsoftware 2814 then submits the changes to the fault diagnosis andcorrection software 2806 where modifications for pro-active diagnosticsare implemented. The frequency in manual mode is to frequent for networkengineers to manually approve each time. Active mode allows case filesto be sent automatically and modifications to be made also.

Active Wireless Unit Density—Active mobile unit density is a rapidlychanging factor that changes every second or faster. The processingability and excess overhead internal trunking affect the time necessaryto calculate density. CASE files are generated as fast as possiblewithout affecting other vital processes. The system could not sendnetwork engineer approval requests before making changes.

Specific changes to accommodate the inclusion of the pro-active featuresare very specific. First, all CASE files created that are for pro-activefeatures must have a flag set that indicates that fact. The flag allowsfast routing of the diagnostics to be considered by new pro-activedecision algorithms. Second, the system must first allocate additionalprocessing power and other resources for pro-active features as theactive wireless unit density specifically requires additional processingpower that can take away from other processes.

User Interaction with the Pro-Active System

The user's primary interaction will be through the display software 2832and will interact will the additional menu items. As described in thedisplay software section, the user may access these menus to control thenew features. Specific interaction and the results are listed below forall the new menu items. Also to be noted, the user may access thissystem using the existing tuning system's architecture that allows forremote access via intranet, Internet, and other devices.

Main Menu Item: Pro-Active Features 5205: The additional menu itemappears at the main menu, which is presented to a user after logging onto the system and being authenticated.

Thermal Interference 5210: Selecting this feature enables the system tomonitor and adapt to thermal interference.

Configure Thermal Tuning 5211: The selection allows the user to edit thethermal tuning configuration file.

Enable/Disable Thermal Tuning 5212: The selection toggles enable ordisable thermal tuning.

Exit 5213: Exits the thermal tuning menu.

Active Wireless Unit Density 5215: Selecting this feature enables thesystem to monitor and adapt to active wireless unit density.

Configure Active Wireless Unit Density Tuning 5216: The selection allowsthe user to edit the active wireless unit density tuning configurationfile.

Enable/Disable Active Wireless Unit Density Tuning 5217: The selectiontoggles enable or disable active wireless unit density tuning.

Exit 5218: Exits the active wireless unit density tuning menu.

Terrain Interference 5220: Selecting this feature enables the system tomonitor and adapt to terrain interference.

Configure Terrain Tuning 5221: The selection allows the user to edit theterrain tuning configuration file.

Enable/Disable Terrain Tuning 5222: The selection toggles enable ordisable terrain tuning.

Exit 5223: Exits the terrain tuning menu.

Network Equipment Performance 5225: Selecting this feature enables thesystem to monitor and adapt to network equipment performance.

Configure Network Equipment Tuning 5226: The selection allows the userto edit the network equipment tuning configuration file.

Enable/Disable Network Equipment Tuning 5227: The selection togglesenable or disable network equipment tuning.

Exit 5228: Exits the network equipment tuning menu.

Exit 5230: Exits the pro-active tuning menu.

Location Tracking System DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE OPERATIONS DRAWINGS

FIG. 53

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the process of a user logging intothe location tracking system (LTS) 5300. The LTS 5300 may be provided bya wireless service provider, an internet website provider, an assettracking service, an employee tracking service, a personal trackingservice or other types of service providers. The user accesses the LTS5300 thru an internet 3202 website, a wireless interface, a wirelessservice provider, publicly switched telephone network 138, a fax ondemand service, an automated telephone system, a laptop/desktop computer2910, a PDA, a wireless device 104, or other types of devices.

To begin the login process, the LTS 5300 prompts the user to enter ausername and password 5302. The LTS 5300 then waits for the user torespond with a username and password 5304. If the user responds 5304,the LTS's 5300 internal CPU and computer 2816 logs the entered usernameand password 5304 into its internal storage memory 5306. The LTS 5300checks the LTS's 5300 membership database for the username and password5304. If the LTS 5300 finds the user's record 5312, the user then entersthe desired telephone number, FIG. 53, BOX 5314. FIG. 54 displays thecomplete entry process. If the user's records cannot be found 5312, theLTS 5300 informs the user that there is a problem with the username orpassword 5302, and the user is returned to FIG. 53, BOX 5302, as shownin FIG. 53, BOX 5316. The LTS 5300 then prompts the user to enterusername and password 5302.

If the user does not enter a username and/or password 5304, the LTS 5300prompts the user to become a user of record 5312 by entering personalinformation and billing information into the LTS 5318. The LTS 5300 thenwaits for the user to enter personal and billing information 5320. Ifthe user does not enter personal and billing information within aspecified period of time 5320, the user is logged off 5322 the LTS 5300,sent to help menu or forwarded to a service agent or operator 5322,depending on the configuration of the LTS 5300 settings and the userschoice. If the user enters personal and billing information 5320, theLTS's 5300 internal CPU and computer 2816 logs the personal informationand billing information into its internal storage memory 5306. The LTS5300 then attempts to verify the user's personal information and billinginformation 5326 by placing a call through a modem to the LTS's 5300merchant credit card services account and charges to the users creditcard 5326. If the user's personal and billing information can beverified 5328, and the users credit card is billed, the LTS 5300establishes a user record 5312 by transferring the logging the personaland billing information from the internal storage memory 5306 to theLTS's membership database 5308. The user is then enters the desiredtelephone number, FIG. 53, BOX 5332. FIG. 54 displays the complete entryprocess. If the user's personal information and billing informationcannot be verified 5328, the user is notified is a problem with theirpersonal information and billing information and returned to FIG. 53,BOX 5318, as shown in FIG. 53, BOX 5330.

The user login, personal information and billing information areoptional features of this embodiment. _(The) LTS 5300 may be provided atno charge, or offered as a value added feature in conjunction with otherservices. Whoever, if the user wishes to utilize all the features of theLTS 5300, a login is required to enable the LTS 5300 to retrieve andaccess the user's settings and user's entries from the LTS's 5300memory.

FIG. 54

FIG. 54 illustrates the initial entry of a phone number that the userwishes to track. Once the user has logged onto the LTS 5300, theinternal computer and CPU 2816 checks the users records 5312 if the userhas a phonebook saved in the membership database 5400. If the user hasphonebook entries saved as part of the user's records, the LTS 5300gives the user menu choices, 5404. This process is illustrated in FIG.55.

If the user has not previously saved an entry into the phonebook 5400,the LTS 5300 then prompts the user to enter the telephone number oridentification information of the wireless device 104 the user wishes tolocate and/or track 5402. The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period forthe user to enter a telephone number 5406. If the user enters atelephone number for a wireless device 104 that they wish to track, theLTS 5300 logs the user's entry into the internal storage memory 5306.The LTS 5300 then queries a user location database(ULD) 900, userlocation database coordinator(ULDC) 908, access users case files 2820,queries the base station controller (BSC) 206 of a wireless network 100with the LTS's device location software 2808 for the lat/longcoordinates of the wireless device 104 being tracked, Global PositioningSystem (GPS) Information, or other means of obtaining locations ofwireless devices 5406. The use of ULD 900, ULDC 908, and other locationmeans is disclosed (offered only as an example of location means) in aProvisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/327,327; and was files onOct. 4, 2001. If the wireless device 104 is not located, the user isinformed of the problem, and returned to FIG. 54, BOX 5402, asillustrated in FIG. 54, BOX 5416.

If the wireless device 104 is located 5414, the LTS 5300 receives thelat/long coordinates and displays the lat/long coordinates to the userin their choice of formats. For example, the location may by overlaid ona display screen 2836 along with a street map overlay 5418, a map of theoverlaid screens may be faxed to a user via a fax on demand service, thelocation may be converted to a postal address 5422 or cross-street usingthe LTS's postal address conversion software 5422 and displayed on ascreen 2836, faxed to a user, or read to a user over the phone using theLTS's 5300 automated answering system and voice text read-up software5426. Once the wireless device 104 has been located and displayed 5418,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to enter the specific wireless device 104into a user phonebook by selecting “phonebook” 5428. If the user selects“phonebook” 5428 to save the entry to their Phonebook 5430, the user isforwarded to the phonebook menu section, FIG. 56, BOX 5600, asillustrated in FIG. 54, BOX 5432. If the user does not select to savethe current entry to their phone book 5330, the user is forwarded to thephonebook section of the user's choice menu FIG. 55, BOX 5500, asillustrated is FIG. 54, BOX 5434.

When prompted by the LTS 5406, if the user does not enter a phone numberof the wireless device 104 they wish to locate and/or track, the LTS5300 prompts the user to enter other identification information such asa persons name, company name, or other identifying information 5438. Ifthe user does not enter identification information within a specifiedperiod of time 5438, the LTS 5300 logs off the user 5440. If the userenters identification information 5438, the LTS 5300 logs the user'sentry, and the identification information is then cross referencedagainst the LTS's Cuss-Cross Phonebook database 2812 or other suppliessources to obtain the phone number for the desired wireless device 5442.If the LTS 5300 finds the phone number 5410, the LTS 5300 logs the phonenumber 5406, and the location process continues as described as if theuser entered the number described above 5408. If the phone number of thewireless device 104 cannot be located in the Criss-Cross Phonebookdatabase 2812, the LTS 5300 informs the user the number could not befound and prompts the user to enter a phone number 5412.

FIG. 55

FIG. 55 illustrated the processing of the user's choice menu 5502. Theuser's choice menu's 5502 physical realization may be in the form of adisplay screen 2836 navigated by a mouse, keyboard/keypad, interactivedisplay screen, voice recognition or other forms of selection. Theuser's choice menu 5502 also may be an automated answering system andcould be navigated by voice recognition, a keyboard/keypad or otherforms of selection.

Initially, the LTS 5300 prompts the user to enter a phone number of awireless device 104 that the user wants to locate or track by selecting‘locate” 5500. The LTS 5300 waits a specified period for the user toselect ‘locate” 5504. If the user responds by selecting ‘locate” 5504,the LTS 5300 asks the user to enter a phone number by the processdescribed in FIG. 54, FIG. 55, BOX 5506.

If the user does not respond within the specified period of time 5504,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select a phonebook entry he wishes tolocate 5508. The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period for the user toselect “phonebook” 5530. If the user responds by selecting “phonebook”5330, the user selects the building he wants to display 5510. FIG. 56describes the process.

If the user does not respond within the specified period of time 5530,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to add, delete or edit a phonebookentry(ies) to a wireless device(s)1 04 that the user wants tolocate/track by selecting ‘Add, Delete or Edit” 5512. The LTS 5300 thenwaits a specified period for the user to select “Add, Delete, or Edit”5514. If the user responds by selecting “Add, Delete or Edit” 5514, theLTS 5300 prompts the user to add, delete, or edit phonebook entries5516. FIG. 57 describes the process.

If the user does not respond within the specified period 5514, the LTS5300 prompts the user to view selected businesses, government buildings,and/or homes on the display screen by selecting “buildings” 5518. TheLTS 5300 then waits a specified period for the user to select“buildings” 5520. If the user responds by selecting “buildings” 5520,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select buildings to display 5522. FIG.58 describes the process to select buildings for display.

If the user does not respond within the specified period 5520, the LTS5300 prompts the user to view a history of call/location/trackinghistory of phonebook entry(ies) to a wireless device(s) 104 that theuser wants to locate/track by selection “view history” 5524. The LTS5300 then waits a specified period for the user to select “view history”5526. If the user responds by selecting “view history” 5526, the LTS5300 forwards the user to the view history process 5528. FIG. 67illustrates the view history process.

If the user does not respond within the specified period of time 5526,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to print a history of call/locationhistory of phonebook entry(ies) to a wireless device(s)104 by selecting“print history” 5530. The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period for theuser to select “print history” 5532. If the user responds by selecting“print history” 5532, the LTS 5300 forwards the user to the printhistory process 5534. FIG. 68 illustrates the print history process.

If the user does not respond within the specified period of time 5530,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to add a history of call/location/trackinghistory to the wireless service bill by selecting “add to bill” 5536.The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period for the user to select ‘addto bill” 5538. If the user responds by selecting ‘add to bill” 5539, theLTS 5300 executes the process to add the call/location report to thewireless service bill 5540. FIG. 69 illustrates the process to add thecall/location report to the wireless service bill. If the user does notrespond within the specified period 5538, the LTS 5300 logs the user off5542.

FIG. 56

FIG. 56, illustrates the process of entering and selecting phonebookentries. When the user is transferred to the “phonebook” section, theLTS 5300 first queries the user records 5312 to determine if the user iscurrently locating/tracking the location of a wireless device 5600. Ifthe LTS 5300 is currently locating/tracking a wireless device 5600, theLTS 5300 logs the current entry into the phonebook 5602. The LTS 5300then displays the user's phonebook including the new entry 5604. Oncethe LTS 5300 displays the phonebook 5604, the LTS 5300 prompts the userto select phonebook entries that they would like to locate/track 5606.The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period for the user to respond 5608.If the user selects phonebook entries to be located/tracked 5608, theLTS 5300 logs the selected phonebook entries and retrieves the locationof the wireless devices 104 requested by the user 5610. The LTS 5300retrieves the lat/long locations of the wireless devices 104 by queryinga ULD 900, a ULDC 908, by querying case files 2820 containing lat/longof wireless devices 104, by querying the wireless network's BSC 206 orby other location means. The LTS 5300 then plots the lat/long of thelocated wireless devices 104 and overlays the locations onto astreet/topographic map 5612.

If the LTS 5300 is not able to locate a selected entry, the LTS 5300notifies the user that the entry(ies) could not be located 5614. The LTS5300 then prompts the user to select businesses, government buildingsand/or private homes to be added to the display screen by selecting“buildings” 5518. The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period for theuser to select “buildings” 5520. If the user selects “buildings” 5520,the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select buildings for display 5522. FIG.58 illustrates the process. If the user does not select “buildings”5520, the user is forwarded to the user choice menu 5502.

If the LTS 5300 is not currently locating/tracking a wireless device 104when the user logs into the “phonebook” menu 5600, the LTS 5300determines if the user has previously established a phonebook containingstored entries, within the user's record 5312. If the user does have aphonebook within the user's record 5312, the LTS 5300 displays theuser's phonebook 5616, and the LTS 5300 permits the user to select andlocate wireless devices 104 from their phonebook 5606. If the user doesnot have a phonebook as part of the user's records 5312, the user isinformed that no phonebook records are contained in the user's record5618, and the LTS 5300 forwards the user to the user's choice menu 5502.

FIG. 57

FIG. 57 illustrates the “add, delete, and editing phonebook entriesmenu”. The diagram illustrates the process, which allows users to add,delete, and edit phonebook entries. The LTS 5300 prompts the user to adda new entry to the phonebook by selecting “add” 5700. The LTS 5300 thenwaits a specified period for the user to respond by selecting “add”5702. If the user responds by selecting “add” 5702 a new entry, the LTS5300 prompts the user to enter a telephone number or identificationinformation 5704, described in FIG. 54.

If the user does not respond 5702, the LTS 5300 then prompts the user todelete an existing entry in the phonebook by selecting “delete” 5706.The LTS 5300 then waits a specified period for the user to respondselecting “delete” 5708. If the user responds by selecting “delete”5708, the LTS 5300 allows the user to delete a selected phonebook entryand the LTS 5300 logs the change 5710 to the user's record 5312. The LTS5300 then forwards the user to the user's choice menu 5502.

If the user does not respond within the specified period of time 5708,the LTS 5300 then prompts the user to edit an existing entry in thephonebook by selecting “edit” 5712. The LTS 5300 then waits a specifiedperiod for the user to respond selecting ‘edit” 5712. If the userresponds by selecting ‘edit” 5714, the LTS 5300 allows the user to edita selected phonebook entry and the LTS 5300 logs the change 5716 to theuser's record 5312. The LTS 5300 forwards the user to the user's choicemenu 5502. If the user does not respond within the specified period oftime 5714, the LTS 5300 forwards the user to the user's choice menu5502.

FIG. 58

FIG. 58 illustrates the process of selection “buildings” that will bedisplayed on the display screen 2836. The LTS 5300 determines the user'scurrent location 5800. The LTS 5300 prompts the user to enter or selecta city by city name or zip code if the default city is not desired 5802.The LTS 5300 waits for the user to select a city 5804. If the userselects a different city 5804, the LTS 5300 logs the user's choice andmakes it the default city 5806. After the user selects a city, the LTS5300 checks if the user has entries in the building memory 5808. If theuser does not have entries in the building memory 5808, the LTS 5300sends the user to the building memory choice menu 5810, described inFIG. 59. If the user has entries in the building memory 5808, the LTS5300 asks the user if he wants to select “building memory” 5812. The LTS5300 waits for user response 5814. If the user does not select “buildingmemory” 5814, the LTS 5300 sends the user to the building memory choicemenu 5814 described in FIG. 59. If the user selects “building memory”5814, the LTS 5300 displays the user's building memory and prompts theuser to select entries 5816. The LTS 5300 waits for a user response5818. If the user selects entries, the selected entries are display onthe display screen 5820. Then the LTS 5300 sends the user to thebuilding memory choice menu 5810 described in FIG. 59. If the user doesnot select any entries 5818, the LTS 5300 sends the user to the buildingmemory choice menu 5810 described in FIG. 59.

FIG. 59

The building memory user's choice menu 5902 allows the user to add,select, and delete entries to their building memory. The LTS 5300prompts the user to select a business, government office or home byselection “Display Building” 5900. If the user selects “displaybuilding” 5902, the LTS 5300 prompts the user to enter the listing theywant to display 5904. If the user does not select “display building”5902, the LTS 5300 prompts the user to add an entry to the buildingmemory by selecting “add” 5906. If the user selects “add” 5908, the LTS5300 forwards the user to the add building process 5910. FIG. 60illustrates the add building process.

If the user does not select add 5914, the LTS 5300 prompts the user todelete an entry in the building memory by selecting “delete” 5912. Ifthe user selects “delete” 5914, the LTS 5300 logs the user's choice anddisplays the user's building memory 5916. The LTS 5300 prompts the userto select the entry he wants to delete 5918. If the user selects anentry 5920, the LTS 5300 logs the user's choice and deletes the entryfrom the building memory 5922. The LTS 5300 then prompts the user toeither go to the user's choice menu or log off 5924. If the user selectsto go to the user's choice menu 5926, the LTS 5300 returns the user tothe user's choice menu 5502. If the user chooses to logoff 5926, the LTS5300 logs the user off the system 5930.

If the user does not select an entry to delete 5930, the LTS 5300 thenprompts the user to either go to the user's choice menu or log off 5924.If the user selects to go to the user's choice menu 5926, the LTS 5300returns the user to the user's choice menu 5502. If the user chooses tologoff 5926, the LTS 5300 logs the user off the system 5930.

If the user does not select the “delete” option 5912, the LTS 5300 thenprompts the user to either go to the user's choice menu or log off 5924.If the user selects to go to the user's choice menu 5926, the LTS 5300returns the user to the user's choice menu 5502. If the user chooses tologoff 5926, the LTS 5300 logs the user off the system 5930.

FIG. 60

FIG. 60 continues the building memory process and illustrates theprocess to add an entry to the building memory. The LTS 5300 prompts theuser to add a new building by selecting “name”, “category”, ‘address”,or “phone number” 6000. If the user selects “name” 6002, the LTS 5300adds the entry by name 6004. FIG. 63 illustrates the process to add anentry by name. If the user selects “category” 6006, the LTS 5300 addsthe entry by category 6008. FIG. 64 illustrates the process to add anentry by category. If the user selects “address” 6010, the LTS 5300 addsthe entry by address 6012. FIG. 65 illustrates the process to add anentry by address. If the user selects “phone number” 6014, the LTS 5300adds the entry by phone number 6016. FIG. 66 illustrates the process toadd an entry by phone number. If the user does not select any menuoption 6014, the LTS 5300 returns the user to the user's choice menu5502.

FIG. 61

FIG. 61 illustrates the process for categorizing the building memory.The LTS 5300 logs the user's choice and prompts the user to enter thedesired listing by name, category, address or phone number 6100. If theuser enters a listing 6102, the LTS 5300 adds a “listing” 6104. FIG. 62illustrates the add “listing” process.

If the user does not enter a “listing” 6102, the LTS 5300 prompts theuser to enter the name of the desired entry 6106. If the user enters aname 6108, the LTS 5300 adds the entry by name 6110. FIG. 63 illustratesthe process to add an entry by name. If the user does not enter name6108, the LTS 5300 prompts the user to enter a category 6112. If theuser enters a category 6114, the LTS 5300 adds the entry by category6116. FIG. 64 illustrates the process to add an entry by category. Ifthe user does not enter a category 6114, the LTS 5300 prompts the userto enter an address 6118. If the user enters an address 6120, the LTS5300 adds the entry by address 6122. FIG. 65 illustrates the process toadd an entry by address. If the user does not enter an address 6120, theLTS 5300 prompts the user to enter a phone number 6124. If the userenters a phone number 6126, the LTS 5300 adds the entry by phone number6128. FIG. 66 illustrates the process to add an entry by address.

If the user does not enter a phone number 6126, the LTS 5300 returns theuser to the user' choice menu 5502.

FIG. 62

FIG. 62 displays the process to enter a “listing” to the buildingmemory. The LTS 5300 logs the user's entered listing and searches thecriss-cross phonebook with the lat/long correlation 2810 or addresscoordinates for all matching entries 6200. If the listing is not found1005, the LTS notifies the user the listing is not found 6202 and theuser is sent to the user choices menu 5502. If the listing is found6202, the LTS 5300 displays all the entries that contain the entered“listing” and the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select the desired entry6206. If the user does not select a listing 6208, the user is sent tothe user choices menu 5502. If the user selects an entry 6208, the LTS5300 displays the selected listing on the display screen 2836 with thefollowing information: name, category of listing, address, and phonenumber. The LTS 5300 plots and labels the listing location on a streetmap with the location of the wireless devices 6210. The LTS 5300 promptsthe user if he wants to save the listing in the building memory 6212. Ifthe user does not save the listing 6214, he is sent to the user choicesmenu 5502. If the user saves the listing, the LTS 5300 saves the listingin the building memory 6216, and the LTS 5300 returns the user to thebuilding memory user's choice menu 6218.

FIG. 63

FIG. 63 displays the process to enter a “name” to the building memory.The LTS 5300 logs the user's entered name and searches the criss-crossphonebook with the lat/long correlation 2812 or address correlation'sfor all matching entries 6300. If the name is not found 6302, the LTS5300 notifies the user the listing is not found 6304 and the user issent to the user choices menu 5502. If the listing is found 6302, theLTS 5300 displays all the entries that contain the entered “name” andthe LTS 5300 prompts the user to select the desired entry 6306. If theuser does not select a listing 6308, the user is sent to the userchoices menu 5502. If the user selects an entry 6308, the LTS 5300displays the selected listing on the display screen 2836 with thefollowing information: name, category of listing, address, and phonenumber. The LTS 5300 plots and labels the listing location on a streetmap with the location of the wireless devices 6310. The LTS 5300 promptsthe user if he wants to save the listing in the building memory 6212. Ifthe user does not save the listing 6214, he is sent to the user choicesmenu 5502. If the user saves the listing, the LTS 5300 saves the listingin the building memory 6316, and the LTS 5300 and the LTS 5300 returnsthe user to the building memory user's choice menu 6218.

FIG. 64

FIG. 64 displays the process to enter a “category” to the buildingmemory. The LTS 5300 logs the user's entered listing and searches thecriss-cross phonebook with the lat/long correlations 2812 or addresscoordinates for all matching entries 6400. If the listing is not found6402, the LTS 5300 notifies the user the listing is not found 6404 andthe user is sent to the user choices menu 5502. If the listing is found6204, the LTS 5300 displays all the entries that contain the entered“category” and the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select the desired entry6406. If the user does not select a listing 6408, the user is sent tothe user choices menu 5502. If the user selects an entry 6408, the LTS5300 displays the selected listing on the display screen 2836 with thefollowing information: name, category of listing, address, and phonenumber. The LTS 5300 plots and labels the listing location on a streetmap with the location of the wireless devices 6410. The LTS 5300 promptsthe user if he wants to save the listing in the building memory 6212. Ifthe user does not save the listing 6214, he is sent to the user choicesmenu 5502. If the user saves the listing, the LTS 5300 saves the listingin the building memory 6216, and the LTS 5300 and the LTS 5300 returnsthe user to the building memory user's choice menu 6218.

FIG. 65

FIG. 65 displays the process to enter a “address” to the buildingmemory. The LTS 5300 logs the user's entered listing and searches thecriss-cross phonebook with the latllong correlations 2812 or addresscoordinates for all matching entries 6500. If the listing is not found6502, the LTS 5300 notifies the user the listing is not found 6504 andthe user is sent to the user choices menu 5502. If the listing is found6502, the LTS 5300 displays all the entries that contain the entered“address” and the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select the desired entry6506. If the user does not select a listing 6508, the user is sent tothe user choices menu 5502. If the user selects an entry 6508, the LTS5300 displays the selected listing on the display screen 2836 with thefollowing information: name, category of listing, address, and phonenumber. The LTS 5300 plots and labels the listing location on a streetmap with the location of the wireless devices 6510. The LTS 5300 promptsthe user if he wants to save the listing in the building memory 6212. Ifthe user does not save the listing 6214, he is sent to the user choicesmenu 5502. If the user saves the listing, the LTS 5300 saves the listingin the building memory 6216, and the LTS 5300 and the LTS 5300 returnsthe user to the building memory users choice menu 6218.

FIG. 66

FIG. 66 displays the process to enter a “phone number” to the buildingmemory. The LTS 5300 logs the user's entered listing and searches thecrisscross phonebook with the lat/long correlations 2812 or addresscoordinates for all matching entries 6600. If the listing is not found6602, the LTS 5300 notifies the user the listing is not found 6604 andthe user is sent to the user choices menu 5502. If the listing is found6602, the LTS 5300 displays all the entries that contain the entered“phone number” and the LTS 5300 prompts the user to select the desiredentry 6606. If the user does not select a listing 6608, the user is sentto the user choices menu 5502. If the user selects an entry 6608, theLTS 5300 displays the selected listing on the display screen 2836 withthe following information: name, category of listing, address, and phonenumber. The LTS 5300 plots and labels the listing location on a streetmap with the location of the wireless devices 6610. The LTS 5300 promptsthe user if he wants to save the listing in the building memory 6212. Ifthe user does not save the listing 6214, he is sent to the user choicesmenu 5502. If the user saves the listing, the LTS 5300 saves the listingin the building memory 6216, and the LTS 5300 and the LTS 5300 returnsthe user to the building memory user's choice menu 6218.

FIG. 67

The user's history report may be generated by building and/or retrievingcase files that are generated at the time that communications aresent/received by the wireless device 104, and which contain the locationof the wireless device 104 at the time of the communication. Thistracking method is best for tracking wireless devices 104, which areused, on a frequent basis during the day.

Alternatively, the user's history report may be generated by buildingand/or retrieving case files by periodically (every hour, twice a dayetc.) querying a user location database 900, user location databasecoordinator 908, or querying the wireless networks base stationcontroller 118-A or other network components, for the location of thewireless device 104.

This alternative method of generating a user's history report would bepreferred for locating/tracking wireless devices 104 that are not usedfrequently. If a wireless device 104 only receives one or twocommunications a day, a periodic report (every hour, etc.) would give amore complete report of the location of the wireless device 104 throughthe day.

A third method of generating a user's history report is to combine thetwo methods mentioned above. This involves reporting case files withcall/location generated when the wireless device 104 sends/receives acommunication, combined with the periodic case file, which is generatedperiodically (every hour, etc., depending on the selected monitoringperiod set by the owner of the wireless device 104, the user of the LTS5300, or the wireless service provider).

FIG. 67 shows the process to display call history report. The LTS 5300prompts the user to select a range of time the report will cover 6700.If the user does not select a time range 6702, the LTS 5300 will sendthe user to the user choice menu 5502. If the user selects a time range6702, the LTS 5300 logs the time range 6704 and the LTS 5300 queries theULD 900 or case file database that correspond with the selectedphonebook entries and time range 6706. The ULD 900, GPS, or the BSC118-A determine the lat/long of the case files 6708. The LTS 5300correlation software converts the latitude and longitude of the casefiles to a postal address, cross street, business, government, housename 6710. The LTS 5300 prompts the user to select how he wants to sortthe call history 6712. The user can sort the call history by: time ofcall, location of call, calling party, or wireless phone number 6712. Ifthe user does not select a sort type 6714, the default sort type is used6716. Otherwise, the LTS 5300 logs the users choice and displays thetranscribed postal address in the selected order with the correspondingphone number, length of call, time of call, and calling party 6718. TheLTS 5300 then prompts the user to select an individual call record thatthe user desires to plot on a map 6720. If the user does not select acall record 6722, the LTS 5300 asks the user if he wants to print thecall history 6724. If the user selects a call record 6722, the LTS 5300logs the choice and overlays the calls latitude and longitude locationon a topographic street map 6726. The LTS 5300 then prompts the user ifhe wants to return to the call/location display screen 6728. If the userselects to return to the call/location display screen 6730, the LTS 5300prompts the user to select a time range for the call history report6732. Otherwise, the LTS 5300 returns the user to the users choice menu5502.

FIG. 68

FIG. 68 shows the process to print call history report. The LTS 5300prompts the user to select a range of time the report will cover 6800.If the user does not select a time range 6802, the LTS 5300 will sendthe user to the user choice menu 5502. If the user selects a time range6802, the LTS 5300 logs the time range 6804 and the LTS 5300 queries theULD 900 or case file database that correspond with the selectedphonebook entries and time range 6806. The ULD 900, GPS, or the BSC 206determine the latllong of the case files 6808. The LTS 5300 correlationsoftware converts the latitude and longitude of the case files to apostal address, cross street, business, government, house name 6810. TheLTS 5300 prompts the user to select how he wants to sort the callhistory 6812. The user can sort the call history by: time of call,location of call, calling party, or wireless phone number. If the userdoes not select a sort type 6814, the default sort type is used 6816.Otherwise, the LTS 5300 logs the user's choice and displays thetranscribed postal address in the selected order with the correspondingphone number, length of call, time of call, and calling party 6818. TheLTS 5300 then prompts the user if he wants to print the history report6820. If the user does not print the history report 6822, the LTS 5300prompts the user if he wants to include the call history report on theuser's phone bill 6826. If the user prints the call history report 6822,the LTS 5300 sends the report to the desired printer 6824. The LTS 5300then prompts the user if he wants to include the call history report onthe user's phone bill 6826. If the user selects to include the reportwith the user's phone bill 6828, the LTS 5300 includes the call historyreport in the user's phone bill 6832. Otherwise, the LTS 5300 returnsthe user to the users choice menu 5502.

FIG. 69

FIG. 69 displays the process to include the call history report in theuser's phone bill. The LTS asks the user if he wants the call historyreport included in the billing statement. If the user chooses not to addthe call history report 6902, the LTS 5300 returns the user to theuser's choice menu 5502. If the user chooses to add the call history6902, the LTS 5300 logs the user's choice 6904, and prompts the user toenter authorization information to verify he is the owner of thewireless device 6906. If the user does not enter authorizationinformation 6908, the LTS 5300 returns the user to the user's choicemenu 5502. If the user enters authorization information 6908, the LTS5300 logs the authorization information and matches the information withwireless providers records 6910. If the authorization information doesnot match the records 6914, the LTS 5300 notifies the user of themismatch 6916, and returns the user to the user's choice menu 5502. Ifthe information matches 6914, the LTS 5300 prompts the user to approvethe charges added to the bill for the call history report 6918. If theuser does not approve the charges 6920, the LTS 5300 returns the user touser's choice menu 5502. If the user approves the charges 6920, the LTS5300 logs the user's choice and instructs the wireless service toinclude the call location history report to the bill 6922. The LTS 5300prompts the user if he wants to return the user's choice menu 6924. Ifthe user selects to returns to the user's choice menu 6926, the LTS 5300returns the user to the user's choice menu 5502. Otherwise the user islogged off the LTS 6930.

Location Tracking System; Summary

The location tracking system 5300 is a method of determining thelocation and then tracking a single or plurality of wireless devices 104on a given wireless device network(s) 100 based on a criterion providedby a user. Based on this criterion a log is created that record thelocation and network status of any wireless device 104 fitting thecriterion. These logs are recorded to a database and then latertransferred to a user database for storage on a local server database.

Accessing the database can be accomplished remotely or locally. Localaccess is from local service terminals on the network or mainframe.Remote access can be from a TCP/IP, IPX, Dial-up, remote server SQLQueries, and other listed methods. This allows for third party vendorsto have access to the said primary embodiment 2800 features and use thetechnology to create product support and technological spin-offs.Examples of technological spin-offs would be; a cellular phone bill thatgives the user's geographic location at the time of each logged call, aninternet 3202 website that would allow business owners to track thelocation of employees or equipment comprising a wireless device 104, ora geographical advertising system (GAS) that would allow targetedadvertising based on the location of the user of a wireless device 104.Many other technological spin-offs are also possible.

Tracking the wireless devices 104 can be done by utilizing a userlocation database (ULD) 900, GPS data from the phone, direct analysis ofthe network communication parameters, or by other third party methods.When a wireless device 104 is not located on a local server a userlocation database coordinator (ULDC) 908 or other system can be used todiscover the location of a device to allow a log to be created.

Logs can be created and appended as a wireless device 104 roams a localwireless device network 100 or a remote wireless device 1900 network.Using TCP/IP and ATM connections, servers for discreet wireless devicenetworks 100 can communicate together and allow seamless networkinteroperability. This allows the tracking logs to record the locationof wireless devices 104 on a plurality of wireless device networks 100having had a request generated from any network connected to the deemedwide-area network. Internet 3202 Protocol 6 and 7 should allow this tobecome even more practical.

Notification from the server to external programs, users, wirelessdevices 104 is a native capability of the said primary embodiment 2800.The messages can be sent alerting the said wireless device 104 of asystem event. A user sets up this event when the log setup processbegins by the user. The user can have the system send an alert based ona criterion such as the completion of a log. The advantage is that analert can be sent to external programs triggering an external event.This allows third party software to use this to create a new technologyand create a new product for their consumers.

An example is for a wireless device user 102 to be tracked and logged. Amessage could be sent via SMS (simple message system) to a prescribedwireless device 104 when that wireless device 104 being tracked leaves acertain geographic region. The system would for example allow a parentto be alerted when their child is going somewhere they shouldn't.

The primary embodiment 2800 also describes a method for allowing a largevolume of users to access the logging and tracking database. The primaryembodiment 2800 describes the method that allows a large volume oftracking to be done and logged simultaneously. By making separatedatabase structures on separate hardware entities the load is dividedinto active database buffers were logs being created are stored, to aseparate structure where inactive logs are saved for users.

A graphical interface and display protocol database 3004 is describedthat allows users to interact with the system and remotely retrievemeaningful representations of the data from the logs. Tracking logssimply contain data that describes network parameters as well asgeographic and timing information. Alone this data is simply text. Thesaid graphical display allows a useful extraction of the data to berepresented. Multiple logs can be shown with data overlays includingmaps, topological information 4160, and other network parameters.

The physical structure for the wireless device network 100 is describedin including the database hardware implementation, the networkingimplementation and the processing implementation. Examples ofappropriate hardware and peripherals are given. Amounts of storage andhardware configurations are described. RAID architecture is listed andthe preferred level of RAID deployment is also suggested for variousdeployments of the primary embodiment 2800 based on budget andperformance.

A major user interaction of the primary embodiment 2800 is envisioned,but not excluded to, the ability to track and record wireless devices104 that users have administrative control over. This would allow themto monitor, record, and review were and how their wireless devices 104are used. Uses could be to monitor the location of workers, children,demographically defined users, and other types.

Monitoring wireless devices 104 by demographics has the unique abilityto allow business to discover the location and moving habits of itscustomers. An example of this would be for a company to track allwireless devices 104 based on a set of demographic criterion thatmatches its target audience. The system would then track all wirelessdevices 104 matching those criterion and record the locations to aserver database log, allowing the company to find a location to possiblybuild a new store that would maximize it exposure to its targetcustomers.

Another us would be for a company to search for customers (based on alocal mailing list of customers phone numbers) and when the customerenters a region (geographic distance) from the store location, a logwould be created. A page or message could be sent to an external programindicating the event. A subsequent push' message technology such as SMScould be used to deliver content to the wireless device 104 in the formof an advertisement. This technology would allow the company to restrictits advertising to valid customers of interest and reduce the costs ofadvertising.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

Device Tracking and Logging

The wireless device 104 tracking and logging option of the locationtracking system 5300 is used to monitor and record the location(latitude/longitude/altitude) of a wireless device 104 over a period oftime. The feature requires the use of the device location software 2808,location database manager904, as their associated components. For awireless device 104 to be tracked it must be able to be recognized bythe system. The device location software 2808 allows for a wirelessdevice 104 (wireless device 104, 2 way pager, satellite phone, GPSenabled device, wireless LAN device, other) to be tracked as long as thesystem can access the control hardware/software for the appropriatewireless device network 100.

For GPS satellite network 114 enabled devices, certain considerationsmust be taken into account due to the nature of multi-path in cellularenvironments. Multi-path is the error caused by reflected signalsentering the front end of the receiver and masking the real correlationpeak. In this case, signal from the GPS satellite network 114 to thewireless device 104. The effects tend to be more pronounced in a staticreceiver near large reflecting surfaces, where 15 m in or more inranging error can be found in extreme cases. In this case, a wirelessdevice 104 slightly indoor or in a city between buildings would berelevant. Monitor or reference stations (in this case the BTS 118-A ofthe wireless device network 100) require special care in placing (theBTS's 118-A) to avoid unacceptable errors.

The first line of defense is to use the combination of antenna 2430cut-off angle and antenna 2430 location that minimizes this problem. Ithowever is not always possible in a wireless device network 100 and cancause undue or uneven accuracy in location ability over a wirelessdevice network 100. A second approach is to use so-called “narrowcorrelatoe” receivers that tend to minimize the impact of multi-path onrange tracking accuracy's. The approach does not apply to wirelessdevice networks 100 and should not be used. Overall the effects of GPSsatellite network 114 error still allow the most accurate locationresults. But consideration for its inaccuracies should be noted.

The wireless devices 104 that can be tracked are limited to the wirelessdevice networks 100 the device location software 2808 is attached to. Anoted exception is when a ULD 900 or ULDC network 1600 (or similar) isavailable for the system to query. In this case the wireless device 104will be able to retrieve the location of any wireless device 104 thatexists in the database regardless of the type of network it is operatingon. The design would be preferred because it creates a type of universalstandard that would allow a plurality of wireless devices 100 to betracked over a variety of networks.

A further requirement for the wireless device 104 to be tracked is thatthe attached network or ULD 900/ULDC 908 to the location tracking system5300 is capable of being polled (by software means) for locations ofwireless devices 104 at regular intervals as short as less than onesecond or as long as many hours. The necessary hardware must exist onthe wireless device network 100 to accommodate the required bandwidthand pipe-lining of multiple simultaneous requests for the location of awireless device 104.

When no database such as an ULD 900 or ULDC network 1600 is available,the attached networks are required to provide the following elementsfrom internal registers pertaining to an attached wireless device 104 onthe wireless device network 100, as to allow the location trackingsystem 5300 software to calculate a location for the wireless device104:

-   -   Base station(s) 118-A or antenna(s) 2430 location for all        network equipment communicating with the wireless device 104        and; The round trip delay time for communications between the        network antenna(s) 2430 and the wireless device 104 and/or;    -   The signal receive strength from the wireless device 104 to the        network antenna(s) 2430 and/or;    -   Other location assisting information

When these design requirements on the network side are available thenthe location tracking system 5300 is capable of tracking a plurality ofwireless devices 104 and recording user records 5312 to aninternal/external database that includes the location referenced to timefor the said wireless devices 104.

The location tracking system 5300 software first utilizes the displayscreen 2836 to display a menu to the user on their display screen 2836of the wireless device 104 they are accessing the system from. The menuasks for the user to enter a single or list of wireless devices 104 tobe logged. It also asks for a time frame to track these wireless devices104 for. The time frame can be from the current system time to any giventime. It can also begin at a future time and then end at any arbitrarytime. Additionally, it can offer a log to be generated that includesonly the location and basic other information (1 second duration orother short time). The location tracking system 5300 software wouldallow subsequent database queries to retrieve call location for allcalls to a wireless device 104. Hence, an additional option that allowsa log to be generated for all calls by a wireless device 104 for anindefinite time period is also required.

The user then can specify the log entry filenames for the databaseentries. When the user enters this information they are prompted withalerting options. These options include the user to be sent a message inthe case of a set criterion is met. The user can then enter a list ofcriteria. These include:

-   -   Geographic boundary that wireless devices 104 cannot        exceed/enter Distance wireless devices 104 may travel from any        user defined location If a wireless device 104 comes with in        some distance of a user defines location

When these criteria are entered the user enters their contactinformation. The location tracking system 5300 will alert the user ifany criterion are met and include a message that indicates the wirelessdevice 104 name and database entry that may be viewed to retrieve theresults. The alerting options may take any of the following forms butare not limited to:

-   -   Email    -   SMS messaging    -   Website posting    -   Online messaging    -   Page    -   Text messaging    -   Automated voice call (synthesized voice) to a voice line Fax    -   Other messaging protocols that can send to wireless devices 104

Once the user selects this option the system can ask the user to reviewthe choices. The user approves them, then the system sends the criteriato the location database manager 904. The users selected wirelessdevices 104 will be tracked for the remainder of the selected times. Theuser connects and they also review a list of active logs and cancel thelogging or change the parameters and resubmit them to the locationdatabase manager 904. The system will overwrite the old tracking optionsfor any modified wireless device 104.

The location database manager 904 now adds the wireless device 104 names(and corresponding wireless device identification 3724 information) intoits location queue. The location queue contains the wireless deviceidentifiers 3724 of all wireless devices 104 being logged. The locationdatabase manager 904 cycles through the list and determines the locationof each wireless device 104 at the said time, and stores thatinformation to a database record as named by the user in the setup.

When a new entry is added to the queue a database entry is establishedand necessary disk space is allotted for the duration specified by theuser. The process assures that the system will not have to slow down toa lot more space later. The database disk space reserved is equal to thedata storage rate times the file size per location query times thetracking time plus overhead for the database file entry.

The queue is automatically cycled though. Its size is dynamic becauseentries to it are constantly being made. Additionally, entries arealways being removed from it. As the time(s) for entries to stoprecording, as entered by a user, are met, and entry is removed from thequeue. The database entry is then moved to a storage database on adifferent physical medium. The disk space on the primary databasesphysical drive is then free to be recorded to by a new record.

Users may now access any records on the second database. They may alsoaccess records for location tracking(s) in progress. When this occursthe location database manager 904 overwrites the end time to the currenttime. The location database manager 904 then creates a new entry thatstarts at the current time and ends at the original end time. The resultis that on the next cycle through the queue the record would be stored(up to the current time) to the secondary database so that the usercould access the tracking information up to the current time.

When a user retrieves the user record(s) 5312 the display software 2832generates a map that covers the geographic boundaries of the usersrecord(s) 5312 being opened. To display the user records 5312 thefollowing information is needed:

-   -   Geographic database 4160    -   Metropolitan road database    -   Building location database    -   Topographic information 2810    -   Other

The information is then correlated to the user records 5312 based on thelocation in terms of latitude and longitude (and possible altitude). Atthis point the display software 2832 overlays this onto the user records5312 and displays this information to the user. The user may zoom in andmove the geographic boundaries. The resolution of the record will belimited to the time between updates and the distance traveled betweenthose times by the wireless device 104. Mathematical extrapolations formissing data can be made by commonly known techniques to approximate thelocation between samples.

Location Database Logs

Logs created by the location tracking system 5300 software and databasemanagement software must have a consistent format that will allowuniversal parsing of the formatted data. The content listed in the logsmust allow for a complete list of descriptive data to be saved andstored in an efficient manner.

When the data is stored to the logs key elements. are required toidentify the logs owner and relevant network identifiers. Therequirements to establish this are the following categories:

-   -   User identifier    -   Home network for user    -   Current network log is being generated on    -   User's permanent storage location

The next elements listed in the database log are the elements that willbe tracked. These elements will be listed under categories in the log toallow rapid parsing of the log by software after it has been created andstored to a user's local directory of sectionalized portion of a homedatabase structure. The categories are:

-   -   Device ID numbers 3724    -   Network hardware ID numbers    -   Event ID numbers

The device ID numbers 3724 correspond to a unique identifier that isassigned to every wireless device 104 on a plurality of wireless devicenetworks 100 that identifies itself and the wireless device network 100it is on (ESN number, HEX ID code, wireless device 104 number, etc). Thenetwork hardware ID numbers are the identifiers of specific radio towerwith BTS 110 or radio tower network 105 side equipment that communicateswith users. Listed hardware elements here allow all wireless devices 104communicating with these network components to be logged. Event IDnumbers correspond to system events that would allow subsequent trackingof wireless devices 104. An example is when a wireless device network100 fault occurs the system will monitor the wireless device 104 thatthe fault occurred on.

The log has a start and stop time stamp field additionally that allowsthe date and time of the logs creation and completion to be noted andparsed quickly. Additionally there are time stamps for all recordeddata.

The next fields are data log fields. In this section there exists onlywireless device ID numbers 3726 because only wireless devices 104 areever tracked. The structure of this field is:

-   -   Wireless device number 3726    -   Tracking reference ID        -   a plurality of data measurements (taken at sequential times)            -   Location of device (GPS data or latitude/longitude)            -   Time of measurement            -   Date of measurement            -   Other                -   Network parameters                -   Wireless device 104 statistics                -   Etc

There can be many wireless device numbers 3726 in the log as well asmany data measurements for each wireless device 104. The structureallows a plurality of wireless devices 104 to be listed and for eachwireless device 104 to have independent amounts of data written to it.The tracking reference ID number allows for a link to the initial reasonthe wireless device 104 was tracked. An external query can just look forwireless devices 104 with respect to initial tracking criteria. Forexample, if a criterion was to monitor all wireless devices 104 on 2physical radio tower network 105, then a tracking reference ID would beassociated with that and affixed to every wireless device 104 log thatwas created for that reason. The tracking elements each have preassigned ID numbers that are given by the database manager software andthe software then also puts the same ID on each relevant wireless device104 tracked corresponding to the tracking requirement.

Cumulative Reports for Devices

The idea of a cumulative report would be to allow a user to retrieveinformation on a plurality of database log entries made on a specific orplurality of wireless devices 104. The reports could be extended toinclude details on all call activity on a wireless device 104 byallowing that wireless device 104 to have a log generated each time anactive call is made. The location tracking system 5300 software isdesigned to allow this to happen. A short duration track occurs forevery call that is made from a wireless device 104 and stored a personalstorage space on the secondary database used for user long-term storage.

The qualifications placed on all tracking a wireless device 104 are thatthe wireless device 104 must verify a location and all call activitymust be valid on the traffic channel. The qualification would excludecertain types of calls from being recorded. In general these calls wouldnot show up as billable calls and would result in a user not being ableto even initiate a voice channel on the phone.

Their duration are typically less than one second. Examples ofsituations that would not record data including location of a wirelessdevice 104 are:

-   -   Network Access Failures    -   Drop Calls before call is established on Network    -   Poor Physical channel properties resulting in a call/network        time out    -   Hard Block    -   Soft Block    -   Capacity Block

All calls that are successfully initiated on the wireless device network100 will have a location database log created by the location trackingsystem 5300 software, and subsequently user location database manager904. All the logs are then stored into the user directory.

A possible use of this data is for it to be included in billing data.The user would receive a bill from the wireless device 104 carrier theyuse that could include call location information on where every call wasinitiated 6904. The caller ID features could allow the system toretrieve the number of the phone that was incoming or the outgoing phonedialed. This would also allow the location of that wireless device 104to be noted.

The location of the user's wireless device 104 when the call was madewould be accomplished by parsing the user's database 3216 by means ofSQL techniques or by other database query tools commonly known. Eachcall logged would be referenced to other call information including timeand date. They can then be referenced to calls listed on the billablestatement sent to the user. The location would be recorded as a latitudeand longitude location. If a user elects the system could convert thisto a landmark location or address by referring to a criss-cross latitudelongitude map/database. The nearest address could be listed. Anadditional option would be to list a general area as opposed to anaddress which could often be incorrect due to location accuracy.

The dialed number (for outgoing calls) or incoming caller's Id (forreceived calls) could also have a location listed. To accomplish this,the remote wireless device 1900 would be determined if it is a land line142 device or a wireless device 104. If the device is a land lockeddevice than an address for the phone number will be available through adatabase from the phone service provider of the number.

If, however, the device is a wireless device 104 unit then this will notwork. The wireless device 104 will have to be queried remotely. In thiscase the system can use an ATM, I based, or other method to query themain service provider of the wireless device 104 for the user locationdatabase 900 entry for that user. If authentication is allowed, and alog was made for a call at that time then a location would be available.The location could then be added to a billing cycle.

If as in many cases, the remote wireless device 1900 had no call logmade, then the wireless device 104 location can only be guessed upon.The system would have to resort to the users “home” NID and then supplythat to the querying system. The NID could be resolved into a city,state, geographic region. The information would be included in thebilling cycle as an approximation of the user's location. An appropriateconsideration would be to inform on the billing cycle that is locationis inaccurate and only an approximation and could be incorrect.

An additional use of a cumulative report would be for an external queryto be made on a plurality of logs. The logging criteria could list anydata field include wireless device identifiers 3724 (ex: phone #'s),logs from geographic regions, etc. The query could be remote or from aninternal memory storage 2818 system. To make this possible, the externalquery would have to be IP base, ATM, or another universal standard thatwould allow a plurality of users access to the system and provide asecure data transmission.

The filter can then derive only the logs for a given user, or group ofusers, personal database folders. The results would then be returned andcould be listed either textually or graphically to the user. A textrepresentation would be for a list of database entries that met thespecifications to be listed on the screen. A graphical representationcould be to plot a map and indicate log locations on it. These optionsare described in the data log graphical display section.

Data Log Graphical Display

The user may parse a tracking log in their personal database. These logswill contain the location tracking system 5300 information for anythingthe user requested from the location tracking system 5300 software. Theuser can read this information after it is parsed in text form however aseries of latitudes and longitudes will simply be repeated at the updateintervals for each time a location was determined. The series oflatitudes and longitudes is not very valuable to a user in general. Aneasy way for the user to gain valuable insight is to display thisinformation on a graphical display unit. This could be a monitor orother display hardware attached to the querying device. It could also bea hard copy reproduced and printed on a printing device.

The log can be parsed and converted to a graphical display for the userby the following method. First, the database entry must be scanned andread all the correlated data for latitude and longitude information 2830for the tracked wireless device 104. The most extreme dimensions in forexample, east, west, north and south (using Cartesian coordinates) willbe noted. In this case you could also use any other dimensionally systemconvenient (radial, spherical). The extreme locations will be theboundaries of the displayed map. The data points will be plotted on thatmap, correlating data for latitude and longitude information 2832 to thecorrelated pixel separation as correlated to the scale of the map. Theminimum resolution is the pixel separation at the monitors screenresolution. The distance will be used to disregard location points atdistances less than a given amount.

The plotting system can then plot the remaining points to the displayscreen 2836. The system will then have a map with the data pointsplotted to it. To increase accuracy the system may also be able toprovide the described functionality that is not common knowledge. Allroadways and transportation ways will be illustrated and correlatingdata for latitude and longitude information 2830 on the map. If awireless device 104 is traveling in a direction for a given distance andfollows a road way but is not on it exactly the software could assumethe wireless device 104 is on the roadway and re-center the data pointson the roadway to increase accuracy.

The plotting system would allow the system to more accurately display atracked wireless device 104 to a user. When the location of thiswireless device 104 is plotted it would not show the device passingthough buildings or other objects and allow the location of the datapoint to be shifted to the adjacent roadway or habitable area. Definableparameters would be the distance traveled along a roadway and thedistance away from the road way that the software could use as criteriato assume the wireless device 104 is on the road. The distance should beconservative as to prevent obscuring real locations. An appropriatedistance could be from 5 meters to 100 meters depending on the tuning ofa network engineer for a particular situation.

Displaying the wireless device 104 travel vector may also be useful.This Would allow the user to see the relative travel direction and speedof the wireless device 104. To accomplish this, the system would samplea defined parameter that represents how many data points to average. Ifthe software averages 20 data points then the average direction andvelocity would be represented by a vector on the display. The foot ofthe vector would be at the mean location of the sample range, and thevector length from foot to tip would be proportional to the averagevelocity over that sample time. The vectors would be plotted for everygroup of data points. The group size could be adjustable by the user andis accomplishable through any data interface.

Another display option would be for the user to have a real-time replayof the user's location. The display could be accomplished by plottingpoints to the screen at the minimum pixel separation over the timeinterval shown. The plotting is easily done and would give the user aperspective of where the user was at various points in time. A textinformation box can then additionally show the time during the callwhile points are being plotted.

The display software 2832 that gives the GUI and mapping ability canalso show a plurality of log locations for a plurality of log databaseentries. The mapping can be accomplished by, as before, scanning logsfor extreme distances. In this case though, all logs that are selectedwould have to be scanned for their maximum geographic dimensions. Oncethis is done, a map could be generated based on the dimensions. Theoverlay for the logs would be definable by programming, but a convenientmethod is to determine the initial starting location of each call andthen to plot these points for each call on the map.

The user may select points and then the entire route can be plotted onthe map. The user who wants more detail may zoom in. The newdimensionally of the map would require the minimum pixel separation tobe re-computed and would then allow more detail or less depending on ifthe user zoomed in or out.

Alternate method that could be used if more detailed locationinformation is available in future network configurations would be:

-   -   Plotting altitude    -   Inside building location    -   Plotting call detail (logged speech)

Inter Network Communication

To make the location tracking system 5300 available to other networksoutside any single entity, a database sharing system must beestablished. A most likely case would be for a system such as an ATMrouting center or an IP (connectionless) based system to be used.

The first system is beneficial in cases where a large number of databasequeries may be made. ATM switching allows for a dedicated path to beestablished between host and user sites and allow a rapid connectiononce the line is established. Basic benefits to consider when choosingATM switching are:

-   -   High performance via hardware switching    -   Dynamic bandwidth for busy traffic    -   Class-of-service support for various traffic type    -   Scalability in speed and network size    -   Common LAN/WAN architecture    -   Opportunities for simplification via VC architecture    -   International standards compliance

The benefits of IP switching as opposed to direct ATM connectionsbetween wireless device networks 100 are that the complexity is reduced.You only route packets to the next routing point and can take advantageof preexisting hardware on other networks to get your data to thedestination, in our case the other wireless device 104 network. Theability to handle security on a traditional router basis is very complexand the speed at which a router switches or routs a packet is very slowand cumbersome because every packet has to be looked at as it goesthrough the wireless device network 100. This can reduce security and isa consideration for any wireless provider when implementing IPswitching. With an IF switch (MTX or other) 130-based network, whathappens is the first packet is looked at and the supplementary packetsdo a quick forward look-up and then everything else goes through thenetwork very, quickly, so it's less costly and it's easier toadminister.

ATM systems require new and expensive hardware to be added but are oftenfaster and more reliable. The system is also a far more secure methodbecause all information is on a protected network at all times. IF basedsystem here could use the internet 3202 to send requests betweenwireless device network 100 locations and allow for rapid developmentand low cost of implementation.

The inter-network structure would allow wireless device networks 100 toquery each other for information. Security and fire-wall precautionsaside, this allows one wireless device network 100 to retrieve thelocation of a wireless device 104 on any other wireless device network100. The inter-network structure would allow the tracking of the two, ormore, wireless devices 104 on a call or other communication. It wouldalso allow tracking wireless devices 104 as they moved off of a networkproviders system and on to a remote system. IF version 6 provides forthe internet 3202 solutions to inter-network wireless device 104movement and would allow tracking to occur over multiple wireless devicenetworks 100.

The data logs could then be generated at the remote wireless devicenetwork 100 and retrieved by the user's home wireless device network100. This would allow tracking beyond the users own network boundaries.Security

The security of this wireless device network 100 can be viewed in twosubsystems. First the network must secure access to the system at a userlevel access, or group access scheme. Second, the system must secureuser system rights. In this regard, it must secure that any user may notgain access to sensitive information of another user it does not haverights to.

The access of a user to the system will be defined and can beimplemented by various methods. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) can be used toguarantee that and external wireless device user 102 has a secureconnection. Modern internet 3202 browsers use a SSL to encrypt theinformation that flows between the browser and the web server. A browserusing SSL has established a secure encrypted connection with the server,meaning it is safe to send sensitive data. In the case of a localconnection less line security is necessary. 128 bit or higher encryptionof data across a wireless device network 100 will allow data to remainprivate in transit.

To allow for a secure connection various protocols can be used. FTP, andtelnet offer some protection, but secure connections such as used byverisign and other companies to establish “user identity” arerecommended. The connection types should be connectionless servicetypes. The secure connection ensures that packet never follow the samepath across a network such as the internet 3202. The secure connectionallows for less possibility of snooping and more security. On secureconnections (point-to-point), connection oriented ATM links can sufficebecause the line is secure in a physical sense.

Wireless device users 102 will be placed in categories based on accessrights. All three categories are defined by a administrator and areadjustable, but generally accepted standards are:

-   -   User    -   Super user    -   Administrator

A user level access will give the entity connecting to the system theability to access only files created and stored in it user directory.The user may only request logs be created for wireless devices 104 thathave been added to its authorized list by an administrative account.

A super user has access to all the user rights for itself, but may alsohave rights to the files and permissions of a group of wireless deviceusers 102. This would allow the user to track wireless devices 104listed on other wireless device users 102 accounts.

An administrator has all the access of the super user but also has theability to create and delete accounts, as well as file management. Thisallows the administrator unrestricted access to all files on a server.It can also alter and change system parameters that affect any or allwireless device users 102.

Physical Hardware to Realize Embodiment

To implement the primary embodiment 2800 there must be a hardwareplatform for the software to function from. The term function refers tothe normal operation of the software that includes the primaryembodiment 2800 as well as any other secondary software packages thatwould run to assist the primary embodiment 2800. The secondary processesare commonly known and would not be covered by this patent. An examplewould be dynamic link libraries that are commonly known and used tolinking various software elements.

The hardware required to implement the user location database manager904 is inclusive of but not limited to, based on any unique hardwaresetup:

-   -   Data storage medium    -   Data storage controller (RAID, etc)    -   Computer 2910 (includes motherboard, CPU, RAM, etc)    -   Network interface card

The data storage medium should consist of a hard disk or othernonvolatile storage medium that is can be accessed by a computer 2910.It can conform to either, IDE or SCSI standards. Extended standardscould include ultra wide SCSI and EIDE as well as other derivations. Theclaimed scope is that a communications protocol database 3004 andphysical layer would provide high bandwidth capacity and highefficiency. Examples of this hardware may be a western digital 10,000RPM 80 GB deskstar hard disk drive.

The data storage controller consists of one of the following genericclasses:

-   -   IDE/EIDE/etc    -   SCSI/U W-SCSI/etc    -   RAID type 1, 2, etc

The controllers are required for the computer 2910 to be allowed toaccess the hard disk drive. To allow for this to work the computer 2910must be compatible with the controller. The RAID controller allows aunique benefit to the database and storage architecture. Having manyconfigurations, very high bandwidth and redundancy of data is possible.The accurate usage of RAID architecture is critical for these databasesas VERY high bandwidth is required on large wireless device networks100. Explained as follows are the recommended RAID types and theconsiderations in choosing each.

In RAID 0, the controller will store the data across two or more disks,writing the data in blocks across the disks. For example, if you havetwo disks, block one will be written to disk one, block two to disk two,block three to disk one, and so on. The data will increase performancesince the controller can read/write in parallel, but there is noredundancy, if one disk fails, the whole array fails, since the data isspread across the array. RAID 0 is the most efficient level in terms ofcost/space/performance, as you will increase performance withoutsacrificing any disk space, though access times suffer slightly. RAID 0is best used where cost/performance is critical, but data integrity isnot. For this reason the type of RAID would be the least recommended forthe primary embodiment 2800 and its databases.

A RAID 1 array consists of two or more disks and acts as one logicaldisk while mirrored data 1532 is passed between the disks. If you havean array consisting of two 36 GB disks, you will end up with a logicaldisk of 36 GB, with data being stored on both the physical disks. Henceone of the physical disks can fail, and the array will keep working, andif the disks are hot-swappable, which is the case with most SCSI RAIDsetups, the failed disk can be swapped for a new disk, and thecontroller will synch the data between the disks, restoring the array tofull functionality, with no downtime. RAID 1 also increases the readperformance since both disks can be read at once, while writeperformance will be more or less identical to that of one single disk.RAID 1 is a way to achieve good read performance, as well as redundancy.For this reason it is recommended over RAID 0 and will allow higherbandwidth and therefore more throughput from the database to thecomputer 2910

Striping with parity increases performance while maintaining a handle onredundancy. RAID 3 does this by implementing a RAID 0 and then creatinga separate disk to write parity information. RAID 3 helps, if you lose adisk, that disk's information can be recreated. RAID 3 works on a binarysystem. (i.e. 11=Oparity, 000parity, 01=1 parity, 10=11parity) You cantake any two bits, and recreate the lost one. The benefits of this areperformance and safety, although with RAID 3 you put a large strain onthe odd disk that contains parity as everything has to be calculated andwritten to it. For ever bit written to any other disk, one gets writtenthere, both bottlenecking performance, and creating more strain on thisdisk. 50 is considered to be a much better option. A required minimum of3 disks, and an odd number of disks. RAID 3 is very expensive in termsof CPU power when implemented in software. For this reason thisconfiguration is recommended over RAID 0 but less than RAID 1 for theprimary embodiment 2800.

RAID 5 is a quite common type of RAID but it doesn't offer theperformance of RAID 1+0, but is much cheaper. Three or more disks arequired for a RAID 5 array. RAID 5 stores parity information (unlikeRAID 1 which stores data redundantly) across the disks in the array,this information can then be used to rebuild lost data in case of diskfailure. Raid 5 is not recommended at all but is explained such thatRAID 50 can next be fully understood.

Raid 50 is the combo of RAID 5 and RAID 0. The major benefit is speed.RAID 50s take the data to write, say 256 k, then split that among theRAID 0, so 128 k+128 k, then split that among the RAID 5s, so you couldbe writing 32 k+32 k+32 k+32 k+32 k+32 k+32 k+32 k all to separate disksat the same time. The same is true in reverse as well for reading. Youcould also lose I disk out of each array and the controller would keeprunning. You can stream high amounts of data to several machines at onceover the network. To do it right it really should be done on twocontrollers, or one multi-channel controller to give the arrays as muchbandwidth as possible. RAID 50 requires a minimum of 6 disks, and aneven number of disks. The setup is recommended for the databasecontroller. The system will be able to keep up with network connectionbandwidth (T-1, T-3, OC-3, etc). The primary embodiment 2800 willoperate at maximum efficiency using this setup.

The physical hardware should consist of a processor capable of computingthe necessary work load. A dual processor system would reduce the loadfurther. An intel XEON system (dual processor) at 1 GHz or above wouldsuffice. Additional RAM⁻ in excess of 1 G would be beneficial and allowfast access to cached data. Similar systems to this are produced by AMDand other chip manufacturers.

The location tracking software 5300 may exist on any of the above saidhardware but should have its own reserved storage medium. A lowbandwidth connection to the computer 2910 is OK because the softwarewill run from cache memory as it is a static program that is accessedfrequently.

The display software 2832 does not require a specific set of hardware,more of a class of hardware. The display hardware 2832 required is adisplay driver or graphics hardware controller, commonly called agraphics card. Performance of the card need not be high but should allowfor an adequate resolution display for the minimum programming of thedisplay software 2832.

Display hardware 2832 that could be used as the physical display devicecan be CRT computer 2910 monitor displays, LCD displays of various sizesincluding palm-top sized displays. Example of this is a Viewsonic 19″CRT G790, this monitor would support up to 1 600×1 200 at 80 Hz refreshwhich would allow proper viewing of all visual data from the preferredembodiment 2800

The network interface cards required would be a 121100 base-T or higherconnection. Hardware such as a 3COM Etherfast NIC would functionproperly. External connectivity to the internet 3202 or other high speeddata access points is also required which often requires a ATMconnection or other gateway routing wireless device 104.

Directional Assistance Network (DAN)

The Dan Comprises:

-   -   A COMPUTER SYSTEM HARDWARE/SOFTWARE    -   AN OPERATING SYSTEM    -   A DIRECTIONAL ASSISTANCE OPERATING PROGRAM    -   AN AUTOMATED TELEPHONE HARDWARE/SOFTWARE    -   A VOICE RECOGNITION HARDWARE/SORTWARE    -   TRAFFIC MONITORING AND ROUTE PLANNING HARDWARE/SOFTWARE AND        MAPPING HARDWARE/SOFTWARE    -   A WIRELESS DEVICE USER LOCATION DATABASE AND DATABASE LOGIC        CENTER HARDWARE/SOFTWARE (OPTIONAL IF LOCATION DATA IS OBTAINED        FROM AN OUTSIDE DATABASE, E-MOBILITY, ETC.)    -   A PSTN USER LOCATION DATABASE AND DATABASE LOGIC CENTER        HARDWARE/SOFTWARE (OPTIONAL IF LOCATION DATA IS OBTAINED FROM AN        OUTSIDE DATABASE, E-MOBILITY, ETC.)    -   LOCATION CONVERSION HARDWARE/SOFTWARE AND DATABASE TO CONVERT        STREET ADDRESSES TO LONGITUDE AND LATITUDE DATA, AND TO CONVERT        LONGITUED AND LATITUDE DATA TO STREET ADDRESS DATA.    -   A VOICE MAIL SYSTEM    -   INTERNET ACCES SABLE    -   INTERNET ADDRESS AND WEB SITE.    -   ABILITY TO MAKE AND SENT MAPS TO WCD, NAVIGATIONAL SYSTEMS,        FAXES, E-MAILS, ETC. . . .    -   A LIVE OPERATOR WHO CAN ACCESS, PROGRAM AND SERVICE ALL PARTS OF        THE DAN.    -   CONVERSION/STANDERDIZATION HARDWARE/SOFTWARE FOR INTER-FACING        WITH WIRELESS NETWORKS, WIRELESS DEVICES AND PUBLICLY SWITCHED        TETEPHONE NETWORKS.    -   CONVERSION/STANDERDIZATION HARDWARE/SOFTWARE FOR SENDING AND        RECEIVING MAPS, F-MAILS AND FAXES.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EMBODIMENTS

FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the Directional Assistance Network (DAN) queryprocess. To begin the query process, a person seeking directionalassistance or location information begins a query for directionalassistance by dialing a specified phone number, such as, for example,411, 511, an 800 number or a dedicated button on a wireless device,navigational system or a land-based communications device 7000. The usermay also process a DAN query via the Internet. The user can enter hisDAN query via a keypad or keyboard, through the use of voice recognitionsoftware, a live operator or by way of an interactive display screen,such as may be found on a wireless device or a navigational system. Theprocess begins when the DAN 8100 receives the user's call 7002. The DAN8100 then queries a user location database (ULD) to determine the user'slocation and logs to user's location within the DAN 8100, BOX 7003.

Still referring to FIG. 70, BOX 7003, if the DAN 8100 determines thatthe user is calling from a wireless communication device (WCD) 8205,such as, for example, a cellular phone, an Personal Digital Assistant(FDA), wireless navigational system, etc, then DAN 8100 queries awireless network's ULD 900 in order to determine the user's locationwithin the wireless network. The wireless network's ULD 900 can existinternally to the DAN 8100 and constructed by the DAN 8100 withinformation obtained from the wireless network through querying thewireless network's e-mobility services, switch and/or base stationcontroller. The DAN 8100 could also find the user's location without awireless network's ULD 900, by retrieving the user's location data fromthe wireless network on an as needed basis. The DAN 8100 can generatethe location on an as needed basis by accessing pertinent location data,which can be obtained from the switch (MTX or other) 130, and the basestation controller (BSC) 206. The pertinent information would includethe round trip delay (RTD), signal strength and other factors needed fordetermining location of wireless device, which are disclosed in anattached document. The ability to determine the user's geographiclocation in the form of longitude and latitude data, when calling from awireless device, is disclosed in an attached document entitled, ‘Amachine for providing a dynamic database of geographic locationinformation for a plurality of wireless communications devices andprocess for making same”. This document referenced above, is a UnitedStates Provisional Patent, U.S. Ser. No. 60/327,327, which was filed onOct. 4, 2001, is hereby incorporated into this disclosure. Also, thewireless network's ULD 900 may be comprised of only a single serviceprovider's network, or in may comprise a plurality of service provider'snetworks data regarding wireless device user location data. The DAN 8100may use its conversion/standardization hardware/software 8160 tointerface with wireless networks and wireless devices.

Still referring to FIG. 70, BOX 7003, if the user's call originates froma publicly switched telephone network (PSTN) 138, the user's locationcan be determined by querying a PSTN phone location database 8145 whichconsists of listings of the names of businesses and private residences,their respective street addresses, city, state and correspondinglongitude and latitude coordinates, and their telephone numbers. ThePSTN phone location database 8145 could be internal or external to theDAN 8100. The database could also be comprised of a street map locationsystem instead of a longitude and latitude based system. The DAN 8100could also find the user's location without a PSTN's phone locationdatabase 8145, by retrieving the user's location data from the PSTN 138on an as needed basis. The location can be generated on an as neededbasis within the DAN 8100 by accessing pertinent location data, whichcan be obtained from the switch (MTX or other) 130, and the base stationcontroller (BSC) 206 of the PSTN 138. The DAN 8100 may use itsconversion/standardization hardware/software 8160 to interface with thePSTN 138.

Regardless of whether the user is calling form a wireless device or alandline, once the user's geographic location has been determined andlogged into the DAN's voice mapping software 8110, The DAN's automatedtelephone system prompts the user with a menu of services 7004. Stillreferring to FIG. 70, the DAN 8100 first asks the user “If you know thephone number of your desired destination, and would like to receivedirections to that destination, please press or say 1” 7006. Theautomated telephone system waits for the user's response 7008. If theuser selects “1”, the user is forwarded to FIG. 71, BOX 7100, theportion of the query process that retrieves the geographic coordinatesof the users destination, based on the destination's area code andtelephone number 7010.

Again referring to FIG. 70, BOX 7008, if the user does not select “1”within a specified period of time, the automated telephone systemcontinues to instruct the user “For the telephone number and directionsto a specific business or person by name, press or say “2” 7012. Theautomated telephone system waits for the user's response 7014. If theuser selects “2”, the user is forwarded to FIG. 72, BOX 7200, theportion of the query process that retrieves the business or residentiallisting by the name of the listing 7016.

Still referring to FIG. 70, BOX 7014, if the user does not select “2”within a specified period of time, the automated telephone systemcontinues to instruct the user, “For a phone number and directions tothe nearest business by category, such as for example, a gas station orrestaurant, press or say “3” 7018. If the user selects “3”, the user isforwarded to FIG. 73, BOX 7300, the portion of the query process thatretrieves the geographic coordinates of the users destination, based onthe category of the business which the user wishes to find 7022.

Again referring to FIG. 70, BOX 7020, if the user does not select “3”within a specified period of time, the automated telephone systemcontinues to instruct the user, “For a phone number and directions to asspecific address, press or say “4” 7024. If the user selects “4”, theuser is forwarded to FIG. 74, BOX 7400, the portion of the query processthat retrieves the geographic coordinates of the specific address theuser is requesting directions and the phone number 7028. Still referringto FIG. 70, BOX 7026, if the user does not select “4” within a specifiedperiod of time, the automated telephone system continues to instruct theuser, “To locate or track a wireless device, press or say “5” 7030. TheDAN 8100 then waits a specified period of time for the user to respondby selecting “5” 7032. If the user selects “5”, the user is forwarded toFIG. 78, BOX 7800 and the DAN 8100 continues it's query process 7034.

Again referring to FIG. 70, BOX 7032, if the user does not select ‘5”within a specified period of time, the automated telephone systemcontinues to instruct the user, “To repeat these choices, press or say“6” 7036. The DAN 8100 then waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond by selecting “6” 7038. If the user selects “6”, the useris returned to FIG. 70, BOX 7006, the portion of the query process whichhas been described above is repeated 7032. If the user does not select“6” within a specified period of time, the automated telephone systemcontinues to instruct the user, “To end this call, press or say “9”, orhang up” 7040. The DAN 8100 then waits a specified period of time forthe user to respond by selecting “9” 7042. If the user selects “9”, thecall is terminated 7044. If the user does not select ‘9” within aspecified period of time, the automated telephone system continues toinstruct the user, “To be connected to a DAN Operator, press or say “0”,or say on the line” 7046. The automated telephone system then forwardsthe user's call, to a live operator for assistance 7048. The liveoperator has direct access to all components of the DAN 8100 and canassist the user's how are having trouble with the automated system.

Now referring to FIG. 71, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “Please dial or speak the area code and phone number of yourdesired destination to receive directions to that location” 7100. Theautomated telephone system waits for the user to dial or speak the areacode and telephone number to the desired destination 7102. The automatedtelephone system waits for the user to respond within a specified periodof time by dialing the phone number 7104. If the user dials the phonenumber, the number is matched against numbers within the PSTN phonelocation database 7110 of business and residential listings, which maybe internal or external to the DAN 8100. The automated telephone systemthen tells the user, “We have located “X” number possible match(s)”7114.

Still referring to FIG. 71, if the user does not dial a phone numberwithin the specified period of time, the automated telephone systemwaits for the user to respond by speaking the phone number 7106. If theuser does not respond within a specified period of time, the user'squery is forwarded to FIG. 71 BOX 7126, for further processing. If theuser responds by speaking the phone number, a voice recognition programwithin the DAN 8100 converts the user's words into texts 7108. The DAN8100 matches the text against telephone numbers contained within thedatabase of business and residential listings 7112. The automatedtelephone system tells the user, “We have located “X” number possiblematch(s)” 7114.

Again referring to FIG. 71, the automated telephone system theninstructs the user, “For directions to “listing 1” located at “address1” with a phone number of “phone 1”, press or say “1” 7116. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to press or say “1” 7118. If the user selects “1”, the user'schoice is logged within the DAN 8100, and the user's query is forwardedto FIG. 75, BOX 7500, for further processing 7120. If the user does notselect “1”, the automated telephone system instructs the user, “Torepeat listing(s), press or say “4” 7122. The automated telephone systemthen waits a specified period of time for the user to respond bypressing or saying “4” 7124. If the user does select “4”, the automatedtelephone system returns to FIG. 71, BOX 7116 and repeats the listing.If the user does not select “4” within the specified period of time, theautomated telephone system instructs the user, “To request a newlisting, press or say “5” 7126. If the user selects “5”, the DAN 8100returns the user to FIG. 70, BOX 7006, where the user can begin tosearch for a new listing 7130. If the user does not select “5”, theautomated telephone system instructs the user, “To be connected to aDirectional Assistance Operator, press or say “0”, or stay online” 7132.The automated telephone system then forwards the user, to a livedirectional assistance operator for assistance 7134.

Now referring to FIG. 72, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “Please speak the name of the business or residents you wish tofind” 7200. The automated telephone system waits for the user to speakthe name of the desired business or person 7202. The voice interfacesoftware 8105 and voice mapping software 8110 within the DAN 8100converts the user's spoken words into text 7204. The DAN 8100 matchesthe text against names within the PSTN phone location database 8145,which may be internal or external to the DAN 8100, BOX 7206. Theautomated telephone system then informs the user, “We have located “X”number of possible match(s)” 7208.

Still referring to FIG. 72, the automated telephone system theninstructs that user, “For directions to “listing 1” located at “address1”, with a phone number of “phone number 1”, press or say 1” 7210. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond by selecting “1” 7212. If the user selects “1”, theuser's choice is logged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards theuser to FIG. 75, BOX 7500, for further processing 7214. If the user doesnot respond by selecting “1”, the automated telephone system instructsthe user, “For directions to “listing 2” located at “address 2”, with aphone number of “phone number 2”, press or say “2” 7216. The automatedtelephone system then waits a specified period of time for the user torespond by selecting “2” 7218. If the user selects “2”, the user'schoice is logged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards the userto FIG. 75, BOX 7500, for further processing 7220. If the user does notrespond by selecting “2”, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “For directions to “listing 3” located at “address 3”, with aphone number of “phone number 3”, press or say “3” 7222. The automatedtelephone system then waits a specified period of time for the user torespond by selecting “3” 7224. If the user selects “3”, the user'schoice is logged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards the userto FIG. 75, BOX 7500, for further processing 7226.

Again referring to FIG. 72, if the user does not respond by selecting“3”, the automated telephone system instructs the user, “To repeat theprevious listing(s), press or say “4” 7228. The automated telephonesystem then waits a specified period of time for the user to respond byselecting “4” 7230. If the user selects “4”, the DAN 8100 returns theuser to FIG. 72, BOX 7210, were listings are repeated by the DAN'sautomated telephone system. If the user does not select the automatedtelephone system instructs the user, “To request a new listing, press orsay “5” 7232. The automated telephone system then waits a specifiedperiod of time for the user to respond by selecting “5” 7234. If theuser selects “5”, the DAN 8100 returns the user's query to FIG. 70, BOX7006, were a new query process can begin 7236. If the user does notselect “5”, the automated telephone system instructs the user, “To beconnected to a Directional Assistance Operator, Press “0”, or say on theline” 7238. The user's call is then forwarded to a live operator forassistance 7240.

Now referring to FIG. 73, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “Please speak the category of business you wish to find” 7300. Theautomated telephone system waits for the user to speak the name of thedesired business category 7302. The voice interface software 8105 andvoice mapping software 8110 within the DAN 8100 converts the user'sspoken words into text 7304. The DAN 8100 matches the text againstcategories within the PSTN phone location database 8145 that mostclosely correspond to the user's geographic location 7306. If the DAN8100 does not find any listings within the user's selected category7308, the automated telephone system informs the user, “No listings werefound in this category” 7336. The automated telephone system theninstructs the user, “To request a new listing, press or say 5” 7338. TheDAN 8100 then waits a specified period of time for the user's response7340. If the user selects “5”, the user is returned to FIG. 70, BOX7006, for an opportunity to select a new listing 7342. If the user doesnot select “5”, the automated telephone system instructs the user, “Tobe connected to a Directional Assistance Operator, Press “0”, or say onthe line” 7344. The user's call is then forwarded to a live operator forassistance 7346.

Still referring to FIG. 73, if the DAN 8100 finds the requestedcategory, the listings contained within that category are sortedaccording to distance from the user's geographic location 7310. Theautomated telephone system then informs the user, ‘We have located “X”number of possible match(s)” 7312. The number “found” listings that areactually available to the user can be set within the DAN 8100 so as onlyto provide, for example, only the three closest listings within theselected category.

Still referring to FIG. 73, the automated telephone system theninstructs that user, “For directions to “listing 1” located at “address1”, with a phone number of ‘phone number 1”,press or say “1” 7314. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond 7316. If the user selects “1”, the user's choice islogged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards the user to FIG. 75,BOX 7500, for further processing 7318. If the user does not respond, theautomated telephone system instructs the user, “For directions to‘listing 2” located at “address 2”, with a phone number of “phone number2”, press or say ‘2” 7320. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time for the user to respond 7322. If the userselects “2”, the user's choice is logged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN8100 forwards the user to FIG. 75, BOX 7500, for further processing7324. If the user does not respond, the automated telephone systeminstructs the user, “For directions to “listing 3” located at “address3”, with a phone number of “phone number 3”, press or say “3” 7326. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond 7328. If the user selects “3”, the user's choice islogged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards the user to FIG. 75,BOX 7500, for further processing 7330.

Again referring to FIG. 73, if the user does not respond, the automatedtelephone system instructs the user, “To repeat the previous listing(s),press or say “4” 7332. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time for the user to respond 7334. If the userselects “4”, the user is returned to FIG. 73, BOX 7314, were listingsare repeated through the DAN's automated telephone system. If the userdoes not select “4”, the automated telephone system instructs the user,“To request a new listing, press or say “5” 7338. If the user selects“5”, the user's query is returned to FIG. 70, BOX 7006, were a new queryprocess can begin 7342. If the user does not select “5”, the automatedtelephone system instructs the user, “To be connected to a DirectionalAssistance Operator, Press “0”, or say on the line” 7344. The user'scall is then forwarded to a live operator for assistance 7346.

Now referring to FIG. 74, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “Please speak the complete Street address including city andstate, to receive phone number and directions to that address” 7400. Theautomated telephone system waits for the user to speak the name of thedesired business or person 7402. The voice interface software 8105 andvoice mapping software 8110 within the DAN 8100 converts the user'sspoken words into text 7404. The DAN 8100 matches the text againstaddresses within the PSTN phone location database 7406. The automatedtelephone system then informs the user, “We have located “X” number ofpossible match(s)” 7408.

Still referring to FIG. 74, the automated telephone system theninstructs the user, “For directions to “listing 1” located at “address1”, with a phone number of “phone number 1”, press or say 1” 7410. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond 7412. If the user selects 1”, the user's choice islogged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards the user to FIG. 75,BOX 7500, for further processing 7414. If the user does not respond, theautomated telephone system instructs the user, “For directions to“listing 2” located at “address 2”, with a phone number of “phone number2”, press or say “2” 7416. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time for the user to respond 7418. If the userselects ‘2” the user's choice is logged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN8100 forwards the user to FIG. 75, BOX 7500, for further processing7420. If the user does not respond, the automated telephone systeminstructs the user, “For directions to “listing 3” located at “address3”, with a phone number of “phone number 3”, press or say “3” 7422. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond 7424. If the user selects “3”, the user's choice islogged into the DAN 8100, and the DAN 8100 forwards the user to FIG. 75,BOX 7500, for further processing 7426.

Again referring to FIG. 74, if the user does not respond, the automatedtelephone system instructs the user, “To repeat the previous listing(s),press or say “4” 7428. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time for the user to respond 7430. If the userselects ‘4”, the DAN 8100 returns the user to FIG. 74, BOX 7410, wherelistings are repeated. If the user does not select “4”, the automatedtelephone system instructs the user, “To request a new listing, press orsay “5” 7432. If the user selects “5”, the user's query is returned toFIG. 70, BOX 7006, were a new query process can begin 7436. If the userdoes not select “5”, the automated telephone system instructs the user,“To be connected to a Directional Assistance Operator, Press “0”, or sayon the tine” 7438. The user's call is then forwarded to a live operatorfor assistance 7440.

Now referring to FIG. 75, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “To receive directions based on fastest travel time with currenttraffic conditions, press or say 1” 7500. The automated telephone systemwaits a specified period of time for the user to respond 7502. If theuser does not respond with a specified period of time, the query processis forwarded to FIG. 76, BOX 7600, for further processing 7506. If theuser does select “1”, the traffic monitoring software 8125 and routingsoftware 8120, within the DAN 8100, plots the user's location andlocation of the selected destination, and determines a selected numberof possible logical routes. The routes are sent to the DAN's trafficmonitoring software and routing software 7504. The traffic monitoringsoftware 8125 and routing software 8120 queries the wireless network'sULD 900 to examine the flow of traffic based on the movement and densityof wireless devices, and calculates the fastest route based on availableinformation including traffic movement, speed limits (if available) anddistance 7508.

Still referring to FIG. 75, upon determining the fastest route, thetraffic monitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120 thencalculates direction, distance, and estimated travel time 7510. Theautomated telephone system then informs the user, “Your destination is“X’ miles “North/South” and “Y” miles “East/West”, with an estimateddriving distance of “W” miles. Current travel time is estimated at ‘1’minutes” 7512. The automated telephone system then instructs the user,“To continue with these directions and receive the travel plans, pressor say “1” 7514. The automated telephone system then waits a specifiedperiod of time for the user to select 1” 7516. If that user does notrespond with within a specified period of time, the automated telephonesystem then instruments the user, “To repeat the previous information,press or say “2” 7528. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time for the user to select ‘2” 7530. If the userresponds by selecting ‘2”, the DAN 8100 returns the user to FIG. 75, BOX7512. If the user does not select “2” within a specified period of time,the automated telephone system then instruments the user, To return tothe main menu, or to enter a new destination, press or say “3” 7532. Theautomated telephone system then waits a specified period of time for theuser to select “3” 7534. If the user responds by selecting “3”, the useris returned to FIG. 70, BOX 7006 to began a new query 7536. If the userdoes not select “3” within a specified period of time, the automatedtelephone system then informs the user, “Thanking you for using theDirection Assistance Service”, and the call is terminated 7526.

Again referring to FIG. 75, BOX 7516, if the user selects “1”, theautomated telephone system then instructs the user, “To repeat thesedirections at anytime, press or say “9”. The directions are as follows,“XXXXXX” 7518. The automated telephone system then instructs the user,“To be instructed when to turn, to receive a notice when the fastestroute to changes due to traffic conditions, or to receive a map of thetravel plan, press or say 1” 7520. The automated telephone system thenwaits a specified period of time for the user to select “1” 7522. If theuser responds by selecting “1”, the user is forwarded to FIG. 79, BOX7900 for further processing 7524. If the user does not select “1” withina specified period of time, the automated telephone system then informsthe user, “Thanking you for using the Direction Assistance Services”,and the call is terminated 7526.

Now referring to FIG. 76, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “To receive directions based shortest travel distance, press orsay “2” 7600. The automated telephone system waits a specified period oftime for the user to respond 7602. If the user does not respond with aspecified period of time, the DAN 8100 forwards the query process toFIG. 77, BOX 7700, for further processing 7606. If the user does select“2”, the traffic monitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120comprised within the DAN 8100, plots the user's location, and locationof the selected destination, and determines the shortest possiblelogical route 7604. The traffic monitoring software 8125 and routingsoftware 8120 then determines the direction, distance, and estimatedtravel time 7610. The automated telephone system then informs the user,“Your destination is “X” miles “North/South” and “Y” miles “East/West”,with an estimated driving distance of “W” miles. Driving time isestimated at “Z” minutes” 7612. The automated telephone system theninstructs the user, “To continue with these directions and receive thetravel plans, press or say “1” 7614. The automated telephone system thenwaits a specified period of time for the user to select “1” 7616. Ifthat user does not respond with within a specified period of time, theautomated telephone system then instructs the user, “To repeat theprevious information, press or say “2” 7628. The automated telephonesystem then waits a specified period of time for the user to select “2”7630. If the user responds by selecting “2”, the user is returned toFIG. 76, BOX 7612. If the user does not select “2” within a specifiedperiod of time, the automated telephone system then instructs the user,“To return to the main menu, or to enter a new destination, press or say“3” 7632. The automated telephone system then waits a specified periodof time for the user to-select “3” 7634. If the user responds byselecting “3”, the DAN 8100 returns the user to FIG. 70, BOX 7006 tobegan a new query 7636. If the user does not select “3” within aspecified period of time, the automated telephone system then informsthe user, “Thanking you for using the Directional Assistance Services”,and the call is terminated 7626.

Again referring to FIG. 76, BOX 7616, if the user selects “1”, theautomated telephone system then instructs the user, “To repeat thesedirections at anytime, press or say “9”. The directions are as follows,“XXXXXX” 7618. The automated telephone system then instructs the user,“To be instructed when to turn, or to receive a map of the travel plan,press or say “1” 7620. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time for the user to select “1” 7622. If the userresponds by selecting “1”, the DAN 8100 forwards the user to FIG. 79,BOX 7900 for further processing 7624. If the user does not select “1”within a specified period of time, the automated telephone system theninforms the user, “Thanking you for using the Directional AssistanceServices”, and the call is terminated 7626.

Now referring to FIG. 77, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “To be connected to your selective listing, press or say “3” 7700.The automated telephone system waits a specified period of time for theuser to respond 7702. If the user does select “3”, the automatedtelephone system connects the user to their selected listing 7704. Ifthe user does not respond by selecting “3” within a specified period oftime, the automated telephone system instructs to user, “To repeat thesechoices, press or say “4” 7706. If the user does select ‘4”, theautomated telephone system returns the user to FIG. 75, BOX 7500, andthe query process continues 7710. If the user does not respond byselecting “4” within a specified period of time, the automated telephonesystem instructs to user, “To return to the main menu or to enter a newdestination, press or say “5” 7712. If the user does select “5”, theautomated telephone system returns the user to FIG. 70, BOX 7006, andthe query process starts over 7716. If the user does not respond byselecting “5” within a specified period of time, the automated telephonesystem returns the user to FIG. 70, BOX 7046 and the user is connectedto a live Directional Assistance Operator 7718.

Now referring to FIG. 78, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “Please dial the area code and phone number of the wirelesscommunications device you want to locate 7800. The automated telephonesystem then waits a specified period for time for the user to respond bydialing the wireless communications device's phone number the userwishes to find 7802. If the user does not respond within the specifiedperiod of time, the automated telephone system instructs the user, “Torequest a new listing, press or say 4” 7832. If the user does respondwithin the specified period of time, the telephone phone number islogged into the DAN 8100 and the telephone number is matched againsttelephone numbers within the wireless communication network's ULD 900,BOX 7804. The DAN 8100 then determines if the requested telephone numberis located 7806.

Still referring to FIG. 78, BOX 7806, if the phone number is not found,the automated telephone system instructs the user, “The wirelesscommunications device (WCD) you are trying to locate cannot be found atthis time. Please record and message for the wireless communicationsdevice's user, or press “4” for more options.” If the user selects “4”,the query is forwarded to FIG. 78, BOX 7832, to begin a new query 7808.If the user does not selected “4”, the DAN's voice mail system recordsthe caller's message. The DAN 8100 searches for the wirelesscommunications device periodically. When the wireless communicationsdevice is located, the DAN 8100 calls the wireless communications deviceand plays the recorded message 7810.

Again referring to FIG. 78, BOX 7806, if the phone number is found, theautomated telephone system tells the user, “We have located the phonenumber “XXX-XXX-XXXX” 7812. The automated telephone system then tellsthe user, “For current location of the wireless communications device,press or say “1” 7814. The automated telephone system then waits aspecified period of time, for the user to respond by pressing 1” 7816.If the user does not select “1”, the automated telephone system forwardsthe user to FIG. 78, BOX 7832, to request a new listing. If the userdoes select “1”, the DAN's geographic database mapping software 8155criss-cross lat/long geographic database 8150 and then converts thelongitude and latitude coordinates provided by the wirelesscommunication network's ULD 900 to a street address format 7818. Theautomated telephone system then informs the user of the Street addressby saying, “The wireless device is currently located at “XXXXXXXX” 7820.The automated telephone system then instructs the user, “To repeat thislocation, press or say “2” 7822. The automated telephone system thenwaits for the user to respond by selecting “2” 7824. If the user doesselect “2” within a specified period of time, the users query isreturned to FIG. 78, BOX 7820, in order to repeat the locationinformation.

Still referring to FIG. 78, BOX 7824, if the user does not select “2”within the specified period of time, the automated telephone system theninstructs the user, “To receive a map of the wireless device's location,or to track the wireless device, press or say “3” 7826. The automatedtelephone system then waits for the user to respond within a selectedperiod of time by selecting “3” 7828. If that user does select “3”within the specified period of time, the DAN 8100 logs the user's choiceand forwards the user's query to FIG. 79, BOX 7900, for furtherprocessing 7830. Again referring to FIG. 78, BOX 7828, if the user doesnot select “3” within the specified period of time, the automatedtelephone system instructs the user, “To request a new listing, press orsay “4” 7832. The automated telephone system then waits for the user torespond by selecting “4” 7834. If the user selects “4” within thespecified period of time, the user's query is forwarded to FIG. 70 BOX7006 to begin a new query 7836. If that user does not select “4” withthem the specified period of time, the automated telephone systeminstructs the user, “To be connected to the Directional AssistanceOperator, press “0” or stay on the line” 7838. The user is thenforwarded to a live Operator for assistance 7840.

Now referring to FIG. 79, the automated telephone system instructs theuser, “To have a map and travel plans sent to your wireless device via apage, press or say “1” 7900. The automated telephone system then waitsfor the user to respond by selecting “1” 7902. If the user selects “1”,the DAN 8100 sends a map and travel plans to thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 to convert the map andtravel plan to a format which will interface with the protocol of theuser's wireless device. The map and travel plans are sent to the user'swireless device via a page and are updated if the user requests anupdate as traffic conditions change to as to offer a faster route. Theuser can also be notified when to turn if the DAN 8100 monitors theuser's location and pages the user when the user is approaching a turn7904.

Again referring to FIG. 79, BOX 7902, if the user does not select 1’,the automated telephone system instructs the user, “To have a map andtravel plans sent to your e-mail address, press or say ‘2” 7906. Theautomated telephone system then waits for the user to respond byselecting “2” 7908. If the user selects “2”, the DAN 8100 instructs theuser to enter their e-mail address via keypad/keyboard, voicerecognition, interactive display screen or other. The DAN 8100 thensends a map and travel plans to the standardization/conversionhardware/software 8160 to convert the map and travel plan to a formatwhich will interface with the protocol of the user's e-mail service andnavigational program. The map and travel plans are sent to the user'se-mail address and are updated if the user requests an update as trafficconditions change to as to offer a faster route. The user can also benotified when to turn if the DAN 8100 monitors the user's location ande-mails the user when the user is approaching a turn 7910.

Again referring to FIG. 79, BOX 7908, if the user does not select “2”,the automated telephone system instructs the user, “To have a map andtravel plans sent to your fax machine, press or say ‘3” 7912. Theautomated telephone system then waits for the user to respond byselecting “3” 7914. If the user selects “3”, the DAN 8100 instructs theuser to enter the area code and telephone number were the faxes are tobe sent. The DAN 8100 then sends a map and travel plans to thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 to convert the map andtravel plan to a format, which will interface with the protocol of theuser's Fax machine/program. The map and travel plans are sent to theuser's fax machine and are updated if the user requests an update astraffic conditions change to as to offer a faster route. The user canalso be notified when to turn if the DAN 8100 monitors the user'slocation and fax the user when the user is approaching a turn 7816.

Again referring to FIG. 79, BOX 7914, if the user does not select “3”,the automated telephone system instructs the user, ‘To track a wirelessdevice and have a map of their location sent to your wireless device,e-mail or fax, press or say “4” 7918. The automated telephone systemthen waits for the user to respond by selecting “4” 7920. If the userselects “4”, the DAN 8100 instructs the user to enter whether thetracking and map information should be sent to their wirelesscommunication device, e-mail, website, navigational system, computer orfax. The users choice can be entered via a keyboard/keypad, voicerecognition, interactive display screen or other. The DAN 8100 theninstructs the user to input the wireless device area code and phonenumber, e-mail address, website address, navigational system address,computer address and/or area code and telephone number were the map andlocation information is to be sent regarding the wireless device beingmonitored. The DAN 8100 then sends a map and travel plans to thestandardization/conversion hardware/software to convert the map andtravel plan to a format, which will interface with the protocol of theuser's wireless device, e-mail, website, navigational system, computersystem or Fax machine/program. The map and location information are sentto the user's wireless device, e-mail, website, navigational system,computer system or fax machine and are updated if the user requests anupdate, as monitored wireless device travels from one location toanother, or from time to time 7922.

Again referring to FIG. 79, BOX 7920, if the user does not select “4”,the automated telephone system instructs the user, “To repeat thesechoices, press or say “5” 7924. The automated telephone system thenwaits for the user to respond by selecting “5” 7926. If the user selects“5”, the users query is returned to FIG. 79, BOX 7900, to repeat thechoices 7928.

Again referring to FIG. 79, BOX 7926, if the user does not select “5”,the automated telephone system instructs the user, “To return to themain menu, press or say “6” 7930. The automated telephone system thenwaits for the user to respond by selecting ‘6” 7932. if the user selects“6”, the users query is returned to FIG. 70, BOX 7006, to restart thequery process 7934. If the user does not select “6”, the automatedtelephone system returns the user to FIG. 70, BOX 7046, to be connectedwith a Directional Assistance Operator 7936.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart describing the operation of the DAN's trafficmonitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120. To begin the queryprocess, the traffic monitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120plots the user's location. If the user is calling from a wirelessdevice, the DAN 8100 queries the wireless network's ULD 900 to retrievethe user's longitude and latitude coordinates. The DAN 8100 thenconverts the longitude and latitude coordinates to a street address orlocation. This location is plotted into the traffic monitoring software8125 and routing software 8120. If the user is calling from a landlinewithin a PSTN 8138, the DAN 8100 retrieves the users location from thePSTN phone location database 8145. Then the DAN 8100 plots the streetaddress provided by the PSTN phone location database into the trafficmonitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120 BOX 8000.

Still referring to FIG. 80, the DAN 8100 then plots the user's desireddestination by cross-referencing and retrieving the destinationinformation from the PSTN phone location database 8145. If the user hasentered more than one destination, the DAN 8100 can plot multipledestinations for route planning purposes 8002. The traffic monitoringsoftware 8125 and routing software 8120 them determines a selectednumber of possible logical driving routes and the distance in miles ormeters for each possible route 8004. The traffic monitoring software8125 and routing software 8120 then examines the movement of wirelessdevices that are traveling the possible logical routes to determineaverage speed or number of wireless devices on the possible logicalroutes 8006. The traffic monitoring software 8125 and routing software8120 then calculates the estimated travel time for each route in orderto determine the shortest possible travel time. Routes are considered inorder of miles/meters from shortest to longest. The basic formula toobtain the travel time for a possible route is as follows:

Distance (miles/meters)×Average Speed (Miles/Meters Per Hour)=RouteTravel Time

This is the basic formula, but other formulas may be entered into thetraffic monitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120 to includesuch things as number of wireless devices on a route, weatherconditions, posted speed limits, train schedules, road work, roadclosures, historical average speeds based on time of day/year, etc.8008. The traffic monitoring software 8125 and routing software 8120informs the user of the shortest or fastest route (as per their request)and sends the travel plan and map to the user if requested, in the formthe user requested (Page to wireless device, e-mail, fax, etc.). If theuser has requested to receive updates, the traffic monitoring software8125 and routing software 8120 monitors the users location and informsthem of faster routes, when to turn, and other requested items 8010.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

The directional assistance network (DAN) 8100 is a machine and processthat provides a dynamic location routing system and directionalassistance to an entity though a variety of remote methods. Oneobjective of the DAN 8100 is to provide a means for an entity to requestmapping, voice, or other methods of directions that would give the saidentity directions from entity's current geographic location to entity'starget location. The routing system allows a. plurality of devices toconnect to the DAN 8100 and request directional assistance to aplurality of target locations.

The claimed entities could exist as a:

-   -   Wireless device user    -   Land line phone user    -   Internet (world-wide-web) user    -   Intranet user    -   Non-human element such a software package    -   Voice-over IP network user    -   Dial-up user    -   Other user selected entities

The geographic location based technology would allow the said users tobe routed along a path that would take the most direct or most timelyroute to the user's selected destination. For example, a user of awireless device could query the DAN 8100 for a display of the user'scurrent location on a street map, and the fastest driving route to theuser's place of employment, based on current traffic conditions,distance, and other user defined attributes from available sources. Therouting software 8120 within the DAN 8100 facilitates this process. Therouting software 8120 allows a discrete computational analysis oftraffic conditions based on recorded data from a plurality of sources.Current day realizable sources of this information are: data samplingfrom a wireless network, live national traffic alert databases, localtraffic database entries, traffic cams, traffic radar gun” database,direct user input, or other available sources.

The DAN 8100 also comprises traffic monitoring software 8125 thatmonitors traffic conditions in real time by, for example, tracking themovement of a plurality of wireless devices to determine the location ofslow moving traffic. The routing software 8120 uses the trafficmonitoring software 8125 to determine routing information, in order toprovide directional assistance. This directional assistance isdeliverable to the above listed entities.

The user can select routing information based on the following:

-   -   Time to destination    -   Distance to destination    -   Alternate routes based on ‘way points’ set by user    -   Scenic routes (pre-programmed scenic information comprised        within a criss-cross lat/long geographic database 8150)    -   Routes bases on probability of reaching a destination within        time constraints    -   Routes to alternate locations of similar interest (Hospitals,        etc)    -   Routes based on user preferences established in a local        preferences database.

The first step of the routing software's 8120 is to retrieve the currentgeographic location of the requesting entity. The DAN 8100 retrieves theusers current geographic location using the device location software8115. The device location software 8115 allows the location of awireless device, (and-fixed, Internet, or other user defined entity tobe obtained. The device location software 8115 has the ability to queryexternal sources for information. In the case of a wireless network, thedevice location software 8115 would analyze wireless network parametersand data at the base station controller (BSC) 206 or the MTX 130 forcall information to determine the location of a wireless device.

An additional technology that would allow rapid access to this datawould be a dynamic database or system designed to store and holdinformation including latitude and longitude of the said wirelessdevices.

The supporting databases required for the above claimed software tofunction include a criss-cross lat/long geographic database 8150. Thecrisscross at/long geographic database 8150 contains latitude andlongitude information correlating to actual street locators, such as adirectory of listings of business and residential address locations andcontact information. Scenic locations, hospitals, and other‘categorized’ locations could be extrapolated from this database.

The geographic database mapping software 8155 controls the criss-crosslat/long geographic database 8150. The geographic mapping software 8155allows multiple simultaneous requests, and is responsible for bothresolving addressing information to latitude/longitude coordinates andresolving latitude/longitude coordinates to addressing information. Toeffective processing, the external connections to the criss-crosslat/long geographic database 8150, and primary logic software 8101, canutilize an ATM type packet routing. The ATM type pocket routing willallow very fast switching times and transfer speeds.

To allow the entities to access the claimed primary embodiment, the DAN8100 contains two similar software packages. The first software packageis the voice interface software 8105. The voice interface software 8105allows the user to access the functionality of the DAN 8100 via thehuman voice, To interpret the voice signal of the user, the voiceinterface software 8105 works with the voice mapping software 8110. Thevoice mapping software 8110 interprets voice signals from the user(spoken words) and converts the voice signals into data inputs for thevoice interface software 8105.

The voice mapping software 8110 allows the user to walk through a seriesof menus and input information. Menus such as “press 1 to spell or saythe name of your destination” will be synthesized and presented to thehuman user. The user can then respond using their voice, “Hospital”. Thevoice mapping software 8110 would then resolve the spoken work“Hospital” into a data representation of the term. In addition, thevoice mapping software 8110 allows target location information to beresolved into a data-formatted address that can be used along with therouting software to route directions, The next software componentutilized by the DAN 8100 is the data interface software 8130. The datainterface software 8130 receives input data in a usable format. The datainterface software 8130 simply parses the supplied data and passes it tothe DAN's 8100 primary logic software 8101.

The external DAN query interface software 8135 allows externalconnectivity to the DAN 8100. The external DAN query interface software8135 adapts and standardizes the many different physical interfaces andprotocols that connects with the DAN 8100. The package is very importantbecause it needs to be able to support many sophisticated entities thatconnects to the DAN 8100. The entities supply data in many differentways. These external connections to query devices 8140 can be:

-   -   Physical        -   Data connections (Ti, DCI, etc)        -   Telephony connections        -   Wireless network connection        -   Direct Dial-up connection    -   Data Formats        -   SQL database entries        -   Scripting        -   Unformatted raw ascii text        -   Formatted text        -   WAP text entries    -   Data Interface Protocols        -   ftp        -   http        -   telnet        -   dial-up        -   direct-connect

SMS

The external DAN query interface software 8135 takes these externalsources and formats the data stream that both the data interfacesoftware 8130 and the voice mapping software 8110 use to retrieveinformation from external sources.

The DAN 8100 also includes the standardization/conversionhardware/software 8160. The standardization/conversion hardware/software8160 is listed under the previously referenced provisional patent. Thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 functions under asingleinput/single-output (SISO) type control structure, where a singleinput results in a single output. The standardization/conversionhardware/software 8160 receives a command from one protocol, and outputsthe correct protocol to the receiving machine.

The standardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 receives a commandfrom an external network connection 8165 or from the primary logicsoftware 8101. The standardization/conversion hardware/software 8160first checks the received protocol against a pre-configured protocol,and then checks known types of protocols by querying an internalprotocol database. If there is a matching protocol found within theinternal protocol database, then the standardization/conversionhardware/software 8160 the appropriate protocol by checking the receiveprotocol list. The standardization/conversion hardware/software 8160then determines if a conversion can be made. If thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 can convert theprotocol command, then the command is sent to the connected device. Thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 waits for anothercommand. If any of the decision boxes are “no” than an error is recordedand send back to the sending source.

The standardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 differs from theexternal DAN query interface software 8135 in that the DAN 8100 utilizesthe standardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 to connect tonetworks or other devices and retrieve information used by varioussubroutines. The general example would be for the DAN 8100 to query awireless network's MTX 130 and then BSC 206 to retrieve userinformation.

Controlling all the software and hardware of the DAN 8101 is the primarylogic software 8101. The primary logic software 8101 generates andprocesses the usage and pure control commands. Data storage is also partof the primary logic software 8101. The primary logic software 8101 mustbe able to process a large volume of external requests and processescreated by entities requesting geographic routing information.

The recommended physical architecture that the DAN 8100 would reside ina hardware that could supply enough bandwidth, memory, physical storageand processing ability to respond to an entities geographic routingrequest in a reasonable amount of time determined by a customer.

The location that the DAN 8100 could exist can be any of the following:

-   -   At a wireless switching office    -   At telephony switching center/PSTN    -   Located on the interne (with some static/dynamic range of IF        addresses)

In alternate embodiments where the DAN 8100 is located at locationsother than a wireless network, additional equipment will need to belocated at a wireless switch. The DAN linking software 8300 allowsremote queries of the wireless switch. The DAN linking software 8300connects to the e-mobility services 144 that links to the MTX 130. TheDAN linking software 8300 includes the interim linking software 8515.The interim linking software 8515 negotiates and retrieves data from theMTX 130 or the BSC 206 components of a wireless switch. In addition, theDAN linking software 8300 includes packet routing software/hardware 8520that allows packets to be passed from wireless devices (theWAP/e-mobility connections) to the DAN 8100 that is remotely located.The DAN linking software 8300 also includes the DAN data query software8525 to manage the methods used to query the local wireless networkshardware/software.

Routing Methodology to Obtain Directions for Requesting Entity

When an entity connected to the DAN 8100 requests directions to anaddress or location, the DAN 8100 must have access to data sources thatgives the location of the wireless device and the target location.

The following are examples of data sources for obtaining thisinformation:

-   -   User location database (ULD)—containing mobile device location        information 900    -   User location database coordinator (ULDC)—Containing ability to        query multiple ULD's 908    -   Direct query of MTX 130 or BSC 206 for location of wireless        devices Location information calculated by GPS at/in the        wireless device    -   Public addressing database containing addressing for location        queried by wireless device.    -   PSTN Database with a correlated latllong information for a fixed        device, 8145    -   Location information sent from the querying device to the DAN        8100

When a wireless device requests directions to a location the followingsteps to carry out this process:

-   -   The DAN determines the wireless devices current location in        terms of latitude/longitude and converting to postal addressing        relative to roadways.    -   The DAN then determines the location of the target    -   The DAN then calculates the route to the target through current        streets and roads

The DAN 8100 determines the wireless devices' location with the use ofthe criss-cross lat/long geographic database 8150, latitude/longitudecoordinates obtained by GPS systems on the wireless device, a locationretrieved though a ULD 900 or ULDC 908, or similar device thatcalculates the current location.

The criss-cross lat/long geographic database 8150 can convert either anaddress to a latitude/longitude coordinate or a latitude/longitudecoordinate into an address. After obtaining the location of the devicein latitude/longitude coordinate form the information is processed andconverted to standard addressing.

Next, the DAN 8100 determines the target's location. The target locationaddress could be resolved by querying a public addressing database forknown locations. If the target location is another wireless device, thelocation would be retrieved though a ULD 900, or ULDC 908, or byquerying the MTX 130 and/or the BSC 206 controlling the target wirelessdevice, then converted to a standard address by the criss-cross lat/longgeographic database 8150.

Next, the DAN 8100 determines the most efficient route to the targetaddress. While current commonly known software can accomplish this task,it is limited to resolving routes based on:

-   -   Shortest distance (miles/Kilometers) traveled    -   Time to arrive at destination    -   User sensitive settings such as scenic routes

What the commonly used software lacks is the ability to compensate forcurrent road conditions (traffic jams, weather, etc). The DAN 8100 hasthe ability to resolve routes using information obtained from a wirelessnetwork or from other traffic databases, to determine the fastest routein units of time or distance. The routing software 8125 initiallydetermines the route using commonly known methods, but then uses aunique and new method to check the level of traffic congestion along theroute.

The level of traffic congestion can be determined from either gatheringinformation from traffic databases or from obtaining the location ofdevices on a wireless network. To gather the location of devices on anygiven segment of a road or route, data can be gathered from a MTX 130,in combination with a ULD 900 or ULDC 908, or direct query of the MTX130 or the BSC 206.

The information obtained from the ULD/ULDC/Direct Query includes thefollowing:

-   -   Number of wireless devices on the route calculated to target        location    -   Location of wireless devices on the route calculated to target        location    -   Current state (active/standby) of wireless devices along        calculated route

The routing software 8120 uses the route wireless device information todetermine the congestion of the route. The congestion is measured by thefollowing calculations. First, the location of the wireless devices iscorrelated to locations on the route. Next, the velocities of thewireless devices are calculated. The velocity is calculated by samplingthe location of a device at fixed time intervals. The routing software8120 then compares the velocities of the devices to the posted speedlimits along the different segments of the route. The comparisonmeasures the traffic flow and validates the devices that are in thetraffic route and not on a sidewalk or other close area.

In addition, the routing software 8120 calculates the wireless devicegeographic density along the route. Average and normal density would becalibrated depending on the size and attributes of the road. Forexample, a larger road would have a different average density than asmaller road. A multilane highway would have a different average densitythan a two-lane highway. The average values for wireless device densityon roads would have to be adjusted for various road attributes. Therouting software 8120 evaluates the current levels and compares them tothe average value.

After the routing software 8120 calculates the traffic densitymeasurement, the routing software 8120 evaluates the traffic conditionsalong any given route. The routing software 8120 compares the calculatedtraffic density to a predetermined normal level.

The comparison is described by the following:

D_(r)=D_(c)/D_(n), where D_(r)=density ratio, D_(c)=current density, andD_(n)=normal density.

Using this formula, the density ratio for any traffic condition iscalculated. For example, if a current traffic density of a geographicregion is 100 units/distance, and the normal density is 50units/distance, then the density ratio would be 2. The density ratiocorresponds to 2 times or 200% more traffic than the normal trafficdensity for that area.

The equation that determines the time it would take to cross ageographic segment is defined by the following formula: Time=α×e^(Dr*β)where α is an experimentally determined scaling factor that a networkengineer can tune, and β is the normal time to cross the geographicsegment. From this formula it is apparent that when is adjusted the timecan be linearly scaled by the traffic engineer. It is also apparent thatwhen the value of D changes that the Time changes exponentially. Thisshould make since b/c as traffic increases, the time does not increaseslinearly

For example, when Dr is 2 (2 times more or 200% the normal traffic) thetime to reach the destination is not double the time, but less than thatamount of time. Using the formula you can see the affects of the valuesof Dr and in FIGS. 86 and 87 respectively.

After the time calculation is computed an adjusted travel time for thesegment is sent to the routing software. Alternate routes based onnormal traffic travel times are then send and run through thisalgorithm. When the route with least time based on actual trafficconditions is found, the DAN 8100 locks the route as the best trafficroute. Each segment of the route is completed in this method. The resultis a complete route from the origin of the device to the destinationthat allows for the quickest travel based on time.

The DAN 8100 then sends the resulting route to the wireless device andthe wireless device displays the route to the user. The user can thentravel to the location. If the user desires, the software cancontinually monitor the route and alert the user to changing roadconditions and report route corrections to the previous calculateddirections. The user can then take additional detours to further speedthe time or distance to the route.

If the user requests directions to a wireless device on the wirelessnetwork, the calculated route would obviously not be a static route. TheDAN 8100 would continuously update the route as required. The routecould be calculated based on the route taken by the wireless devicebeing tracked, or by simply using the method above to determining thefastest route to the target. The current state of the tracked wirelessdevice would be taken into account. If the tracked wireless device werein an active state, then the route would update continuously. However,if the tracked wireless device is not active or if current locationinformation is not available, then the route would not update, and theDAN 8100 can calculate the route using the last known location of thewireless device. The DAN 8100 would relay the tracked wireless devicestate to the requesting wireless device.

Alternate Embodiment to the Directional Assistance Network

The primary embodiment refers to a system that users on a plurality ofdevices (wireless/fixed location) may obtain directional mapping fromtheir current locations. The DAN 8100 can also be implemented by analternate method. The alternate method would include directional mappingdatabases and software integrated into its system. The method would nottake into consideration traffic density and other variables that wouldaffect directional routing.

For the alternative method to work the wireless device would need tocontain a map and a latitude/longitude referenced database of targetlocations. The databases could be cities, metropolitan areas, states,countries, or other variable sized geographic areas. The map would needto contain information on the current location of the wireless device.The wireless device could obtain the current location information fromthe device itself using GPS or from the wireless network.

The database would need a large storage medium that could be created ona plurality of mediums including but not limited to:

-   -   Hard Disk    -   Micro Drive    -   Optical Storage Medium (CD/DVD/etc)    -   Flash Memory Device    -   Memory Card    -   EPROM    -   EEPROM    -   Removable Storage Medium

The alternate embodiment requires the wireless device to have theability to locate a destination based on address, company name,landmark, etc. If the wireless device cannot find the destination in theinternal database, the wireless device queries the wireless network forthe destination information. The wireless network server resolves therequest. When the network server finds the destination information, itsends back the latitude and longitude of the destination to therequesting wireless device. The wireless device stores and appends thedestination information with the latitude/longitude in the localdatabase for subsequent path resolution. If the wireless network serverdoes not find the destination, then the wireless device alerts the userthat the device could not find the destination.

Advantages of the alternative embodiment are the user will be able to:

-   -   Obtain faster routing information    -   Not inquire a connection cost    -   Not require an active connection to the network

To allow faster routing, the wireless device can query the wirelessnetwork server for traffic congestion information. To allow fasterrouting of the wireless device in regards to time to the destination orfor multiple waypoints and then a destination, a query to the servercould be requested if a network connection is available. This wouldallow the network to access traffic databases that contain informationon traffic congestion along a route to be analyzed. Each segment of aroute could be analyzed and assigned a numerical figure representing theexpected amount of time to travel through the segment. The routing atthe server could then send corrections to the device and makealterations to the routing information to improve the results given tothe user.

The connection to the network by a device would require any, but notlimited to, the following connections that could be resolved andeventually routed to TCP/IP or other I routing protocols:

-   -   TCP/IP Network Connection    -   IPX/ULD    -   PPP/SLIP    -   Wireless Networks        -   2G        -   3G        -   2.5G        -   GSM        -   TDMA        -   CDMA        -   CDMA2000    -   Direct Connection

To make the computations the wireless network the following arerequired: a database of a plurality of geographic locations withaddressing correlated to latitude and longitudes; software to determinethe time to travel on a given route; logistic software to determine afaster route; interface with the requesting software.

The logistics software works by accessing traffic condition databasesnot claimed by this patent. The basic requirement of the databases is toreturn information that corresponds to the traffic density of a roadwayor other geographic location. When the logistics software acquires thisinformation, the software compares the current traffic density to apredetermined normal level.

The resulting route can then (after being calculated) be sent to thewireless device or may already exist there and will not need to beupdated in this case. The route will then be graphically reproduced orprinted as text and displayed to the user. The user can then travel tothe location.

DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES

FIG. 81

FIG. 81 describes the structure of the DAN 8100. The figure shows theDAN 8100 with all the components logically connected. In addition, thefigure illustrates the connectivity of the DAN 8100 to external sources.The figure also illustrates other devices internal to the DAN 8100.

The DAN 8100 contains two external connectivity points. Thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 connects to anexternal network connection 8165 and connects the DAN 8100 to friendlynetworks used to obtain additional data. The external directionalassistance network query interface software 8135 connects to externalconnections to query devices 8140. The connection point connects todevices/entities that can remotely query the DAN 8100. Both thestandardization/conversion hardware/software 8160 and the external DANnetwork query interface software 8140 interface with the primary logicsoftware 8101.

The primary logic software 8101 handles the primary control andprocessing for the DAN 8100. The primary logic software 8101 controlsthe interaction between the different internal components and externalinterfaces, and processes all requests by the different components.

The data interface software 8130 and voice interface software 8105 allowinteractivity to external entities accessing the DAN 8100. Bothcomponents interface with the primary logic software 8101. The voiceinterface software 8105 utilizes the voice mapping software 8110. Thevoice mapping software also interfaces with the primary logic center8101.

The routing software 8120 component interfaces directly with the primarylogic software 8101. The routing software 8120 utilizes the trafficmonitoring software 8125. The routing software 8120 utilizes the devicelocation software 8115 indirectly. The device location software 8115interfaces with the primary logic software 8101. Any access of thedevice location software 8115 must be done through the primary logicsoftware 8101.

The database attached to the DAN 8100 is the criss-cross latllonggeographic database 8150. The geographic database mapping software 8155controls and interfaces with the criss-cross at/long geographic database8150. Both of these components interface with the primary logic software8101. The primary logic software 8101 also interfaces with the PSTNphone location database 8145.

FIG. 82

FIG. 82 illustrates the primary embodiment of the invention; the DAN8100 co-located at a wireless network. FIG. 82 displays devices thatinteract with the DAN 8100. Wireless communication device 8205 connectsto cellular towers 8235, Via Ti/other connection links 8232 from the BTS108, the wireless communication device 8205 connects with the cellularbase station controller (BSC) 206. The BSC 206 links 8227 to the MTX130. The MTX 130 links to the e-mobility services 144. The e-mobilityservices 144 links to the DAN 8100. The user location database (ULD) 900and the wireless communications device location software 8270 alsoconnect to the MTX 130.

The MTX 130 links to the packet data network (PDN) 156, and to aninternet gateway, 8255 and finally to the Internet 8260. The MTX 130also links to a publicly switched telephony network (PSTN) 138. The PSTN138 contains the PSTN phone location database 8145. The PSTN 138connects to fixed location phones 8220 via land lines 142.

FIG. 83

FIG. 83 illustrates the primary embodiment's alternate location; the DAN8100 located remotely via the Internet 8260 at a remote server. FIG. 83displays devices that ultimately interact with the DAN 8100. Wirelesscommunication devices 8205 connect to cellular towers (BTS) 108. ViaTi/other connection link 8232 from the BTS 108, the wirelesscommunication devices connect with the base station controller (BSC)206. The BSC 206 links 8227 to the MTX 130. The MTX 130 links to thepacket data network (PDN) 156 that links to the internet gateway 8255.The internet gateway 8225 links to the Internet 8260. The DAN 8100interfaces 8310 the wireless network through the Internet 8200. The ULD900 and the wireless communications device location software 8270 alsoconnects to the MTX 130.

The MTX 130 links to the e-mobility services 144. The e-mobilityservices 144 links to the DAN linking software, 8300. The MTX 130 alsolinks to a publicly switched telephony network (PSTN) 138. The PSTN 138contains the PSTN phone location database 8145. The PSTN connects tofixed location phones 8220 via land lines 142.

FIG. 84

FIG. 84 illustrates the DAN 8100 remotely located at the PSTN 215. FIG.84 displays devices that ultimately interact with the DAN 8100. Wirelesscommunication devices 8205 connect to cellular towers (BTS) 108. ViaTi/other connection link 8232 from the BTS 108, the wirelesscommunication devices 8205 connect with the wireless base stationcontroller (BSC) 206. The BSC 206 links 8227 to the MIX 130. The MTX 130connects to the PSTN 138 and then to the DAN 8100. The PSTN connects toother remote PSTN switching centers also. The PSTN 138 contains the PSTNPhone Location Database 8145. The PSTN 138 connects to fixed locationphones 8220 via land lines 142.

The MIX 130 links to the e-mobility services 144. The e-mobilityservices 144 links to the DAN linking software 8300. The user locationdatabase (ULD) 900 and the wireless communications device locationsoftware 8270 also connect to the MIX 130.

FIG. 85

FIG. 85 illustrates the DAN linking software 8300 used by the DAN 8100.The DAN linking software, 8300, allows the DAN 8100 to interface withwireless networks, when it is remotely located. Wireless communicationsdevices 8205 send requests to the DAN 8100 signals via e-mobilityservices, 144. The interim linking software 8515 receives the signalsand routes them to the packet rerouting software/hardware 8520. Packetsare then routed to the remotely located DAN 8100. The DAN data querysoftware 8525 connects to the interim linking software 8515. The DANdata query software 8525 allows the DAN 8100 to remotely pass queries tothe MTX, 130, which via the e-mobility services 144.

FIG. 86

FIG. 86 shows the Traffic Time Calculation Performance Based on user ornetwork-defined variables. The figure shows the alpha, an experimentallyobtained scaling factor, on the traffic density-time algorithm. Thenetwork engineer determines the value of the variables. As shown, theeffects of alpha are linearly proportional to the output of thealgorithm. So an increase in one variable proportionally affects theoutput of the equation.

FIG. 87

FIG. 87 shows the traffic time calculation performance based on avariable traffic density ratio. The effects of Dr, the density ratio isshown to produce an exponential result for the expected time to travelon any given route. When the traffic density compared to the normaldensity level increases, as expected the time to travel along that routeincreases exponentially as well.

Pro-Active Traffic Routing System Overview

The traffic control system allows network traffic engineers to optimizetraffic flow in real-time based on feedback from systems such as the DANand the LTS. Both of these system poll on data from other resources suchas the ULD/ULDC and GPS data from mobile devices. The location trackingsystem allows network software located (physically or virtually) at theMTX to access information on the movement of mobile devices on acellular network.

These moving devices, tracked by the LTS, can be filtered to includeonly devices on roadways, which is of interest and is used by programssuch as the DAN to route users from one location to the next allowingthem to avoid traffic congestion. This congestion is based on mobileunit density on the roadways.

Of interest to the traffic control software is the density of trafficalong roadway section that have various traffic control devices that canbe altered remotely. Altering their parameters would allow traffic flowto be altered and ease congestion. Automating this process, the trafficcontrol software would, in real time, allow traffic congestion reductionover many roadways that otherwise would take much longer to implement.These changes are based on various methodologies described in thefollowing text. Additionally, basic software architecture for such asystem is recommended, but does not limit the spirit of this invention.

Traffic Control Devices

To discuss the ability to monitor or control traffic flow, the devicesthat control this factor should be discussed. Not all devices thatcontrol traffic flow can be remotely controlled, and thus cannot be usedby the traffic control software. The devices that can work in thissystem will be listed and discussed in broad terms, as to allow them toapply to many design n a generic sense. Particular devices may beextruded from these descriptions and easily adapted to any specificsetup.

The following generic devices are usable for the traffic control system:

-   -   Intersection Traffic Control Lights    -   Highway Inlet Traffic Control Lights    -   Variable Speed Limit Roadway Signs

Intersection traffic control lights are defined as those lightingsystems that include roadway intersection of two or more roadways at asingle point, with a lighting system that directs what road way shouldcross at any given time. Variables that are affected here are the lengthany roadway may go cross the intersection, and the length of a turn lanebeing able to direct traffic from one lane to the next during thatcycle.

Highway inlet traffic control lights are a simple way to moderate andcontrol the inlet of traffic onto major roadways. These roadways aretypically one directional and the inlet is also one directional. Thelighting system is usually an on/off system. A red light moderatestraffic by allowing one car though at a time, and then stopping the nextcar for a time limit, then allowing it to pass and enter the highway.The control variable is the hold time between letting cars though.

Variable speed limit roadways signs are signs that can alter postedspeed limits based on a remote signal. The speed limit can be controlledremotely thus allowing the posted limit to change and thus control theflow of traffic. The variable here is the posted speed limit.

Detecting Traffic Congestion

Traffic congestion that can be alleviated by a controllable trafficcontrol device must exist at the geographic site of the device. In otherwords, a device cannot alter congestion for which its function plays norole. The congestion must be co-located at the devices location, or inits field of control. Many devices have a range of control. The specificdevices must have their characteristics programmed into the software.These characteristics include range and in what direction, that thedevice affects flow control. Also, the flow control depends on the typeof device.

To detect the traffic congestion the traffic control software must knowthe location of each device. The system must then know the range anddirection to monitor for congestion. These characteristics, as describedabove, will allow a profile to be sent to the LTS for each device. TheLTS can return the traffic density and average velocity of the mobilesin this region. This information will show the levels of congestion.There should be limits at which the system will modify default values.It should not be necessary to modify the defaults if there is littlecongestion, as it would result in little or no change to the roadwaytraffic.

More specifically, for a generic system, the traffic can be monitored inall indicated directions for the defined distance for each. Some defaulttraffic density value should be defined for all directions. Some speedvalue for traffic can also be assigned. Four possible methods ofcongestion can be used. The first is to use the system in the DAN. Thesecond is to look at the average velocity of the devices on a roadway.The third is to look at the density of the mobile devices against somedefault value. The fourth is to look at both the density and thevelocity of the devices. Using the forth method, a formula such asmultiplying the average speed and density together to result in a numbercould allow a basis for more accurate congestion detection. Again adefault value could be defined as to indicate when it is exceed thattraffic congestion is bad. An additional value that indicates theseverity of congestion could be the percent that the roadway iscongested over its default value.

These methods should be chosen based on need and function on anyparticular design. Further in this description, it will be implied thatthis method results in two categories, pass and fail. Pass is that thethreshold is not met and normal traffic exists. Fail indicates that thelimit has been exceeded and the traffic is above tolerable limits.

Described as follows are methods to control and alleviate congestionbased on device type.

Methodology for Alleviating Congestion

Various methods are needed based on the type of traffic control device.Described for each classification of device, are the methodologies toreduce congestion.

Intersection Traffic Control Lights

The congestion of traffic control lights should be monitored in thedirection of the lighting system along the intersecting roadways for areasonable distance. This distance can be defined and included insoftware programming, but a typical value may be 50% of the distance tothe next intersection controlled by a traffic control light. This valuecould vary from one traffic lighting system to the next.

The system should start by analyzing traffic congestion along allroadways at the intersection. The roadways should then either beclassified as pass or fail. All fail roadways should have a percentagecalculated that indicates the amount over the default value that theyare congested. To alleviate the traffic, the roadways that are above thelimit should be placed in order of descending percent over-congestion.The most congested roadways should have the timing adjusted such thatthey are allowed additional time on the crossing direction of theintersection. This would represent a longer green light. This would alsoscale the turn signal direction. The time increase could be proportionalto the percent over-congestion. The second, and descending congestionroadways could function in a similar manner, but give less than the sameincrease. The roadways with no congestion would have the time crossingdecreased.

One additional factor is the time to cycle between all roadways (greenlight offered for every roadway in intersection). This should increaseby some defined amount based on the number of congested roads. Thereshould be a limit though programmed into the software. All timings forindividual directions should sum up to this time. To accomplish this, itwould be necessary to decrease the total time allowed for crossing onthe non congested directions, when and increase occurs in the congesteddirections. Note, that if no directions are congested, then no changingin timing occurs.

Highway Inlet Traffic Control Lights

This system is relatively simple and is based on the ability of thetraffic control system to use the LTS to determine only the trafficdensity of the roadway that the inlet lets into. The density shouldexamine the average density along the roadway, again using some distancedefined for the inlet control device.

The period that the device allows cars to pass is inversely proportionalto the density of the traffic along this distance. A set of criteriashould be established that would adjust the timing for variousdensities. Lesser densities mean more cars per unit time can safelyenter the highway. The converse is similarly true. These exact timingsdepend on particular roadways and should be unique to every device andconfigured initially based on field experiments. Below is an examplethat demonstrates these criteria for a generic system, using genericvalues:

Traffic Density Inlet Entrance Rate 10 cars/100 m 20 cars/minute 20cars/100 m 15 cars/minute 30 cars/100 m 10 cars/minute 40 cars/100 m  5cars/minute

Variable Speed Limit Roadway Signs

This is a method very similar to above, but is mainly a safety featurethat can reduce the possibility of an accident, and thus the primarycase for traffic delays, roadside accidents. The system is inverselyproportional to traffic density as above. The system should poll the LTSfor device density for a distance defined for the specific device. Thespeed then should be adjusted to levels that are safe for varioustraffic densities. As cars are closer together, the safe speed limitdecreases. Various brackets of speed to indicate for various ranges oftraffic density could be defined and integrated into the software. Thetraffic control software than can automatically adjust the speed valuesbased on traffic density.

Basic Software Requirements

The software architecture of this system is designed so it can becollocated at the MTX or virtually hosted elsewhere but assessable tothe MTX. The software should have access to the LTS and have subroutineswritten to allow it to submit tracking queries to the LTS to determinetraffic density and other necessary factors.

The system should be designed to have an administrator's option toenable and disable the system and any particular devices. The systemshould allow a device to be added and all its parameters added as well.As each device is added, a device ID can be associated. This device IDwould allow each device to be distinguished among each other. The systemcould then send electronic signals to the devices though direct orindirect routes to modify parameters on each device. These routes can becustom design or pass over public or private networks that connect thetwo points. The devices and their modification methodology are not thefocus of this patent, however these devices are commonly knowntechnology and software can easily be integrated into this that allowsremote control to occur.

Call Routing System Overview

The call routing system allows a user to have calls that are intendedfor the users mobile device, routed to alternate location, based on thecurrent location or the device and its proximity to the said alternatelocations. The user has the option to supply the phone numbers ofdevices that the user would like it devices to auto-route incoming callsto when the user is near those locations, and when the feature isactivated. The user also submits a geographic distance from the devicethat when the user's device enters into, will activate the routingfeature and allow the user the option of having its calls routed to thenew device (user is asked if the new location, is acceptable for routingby SMS or similar 2-way message from server). When the user exits theregion near the device (as listed in his preferences) the system againasks if the user wants call to be routed back to the users mobiledevice. If the user has no devices near them, a feature also allowsnearby public devices to be offered to the user as alternate locationsfor routing.

The call routing system also allows for outing call routing which allowsa user, service provider or manufacturer to route outgoing calls toselected phone numbers based on the location of the wireless device. Forexample, if a user dials “911” for emergency services, the call will berouted to the closest “911” call center, based on the location of thewireless device. An other example of the outgoing call routing systemwould be a user accessing the internet. When the user dials to connectto the internet, her call may be routed to a local internet accessnumber based on the location of the wireless device. This outgoing callrouting system will enable a user of a wireless device to optimize theuse of his wireless device by receiving better service at a lower cost.

System Design and Function

For the routing system to function, the system must deploy its softwareat the MTX of a cellular provider. An alternate location on a intranetor internet is possible, but would require the MTX to link to thatservice and transport method. The software would rely on a service suchas the LTS to allow monitoring and tracking of mobile devices. It alsorequires a database of user preferences that include: routing numbersand distance from routing numbers to activate routing. Authenticationand other system level information for users should also exist. Aplurality of users may activate the system, and the system will functionfor all active users. The LTS acts as an cooperative program that helpsthe current embodiment in many ways, as listed below. This softwarerequires the flowing methods and function as listed below to be carriedout to function properly.

Determining Location of User

To allow the system to operate the user of a mobile device must have hisor her devices location monitored by the network. To do this, variousmethods exist such as the directional assistance network (DAN). The DANallows a device to be monitored for location and additionally allowssystem events to be triggered based on the location of the device. Themain requirement is that the location of the device be stored in adatabase or other location such that an external program can queue thisinformation. A possible way to implement this is to use a User LocationDatabase or a User Location Database Network. Other methods would bedirect querying of the MTX or BSC to determine the location of a saidmobile device, or a mobile device equipped with location informationsuch as GPS or triangulation.

Determining Phones Near to User

To determine the fixed phones near a mobile device the system must firstobtain the location of the said mobile device. When the system, usingany of the above methods as further explained in accompanyingdocumentation (on LTS, ULD, ULDC), has acquired the devices location, itstores it to a temporary register (software variable). The system mustthen check the user preferences, as stored in a local or remoteconfiguration file, to determine the routing protocols. In this case, itmust check the configuration to see if the user has indicated a phonenumber to route calls to. If no number exists then the system canattempt to route the call to any public telephone device in thevicinity. Routing to a private phone system would also be possible, butsecurity and privacy concerns would hamper this. But for completeness,the methodology here applies to all cases.

If the system checks the configuration and no devices are listed, or nodevices near the mobile device (near implies a distance parameter thatis in the configuration file) exist, then the mobile devices can be senta message alerting the user that private devices were found. If this isthe case, then the user can reply with three options:

-   -   Route to nearest public device    -   Route to new private device (user must enter new device ID)    -   Turn off Routing

Determining Public Phones Near to User

The user has the option to have the call routed to the nearest publicdevice. If the user chooses this option than the system would query thePSTN and retrieve all public phones within the following parameters. Thesystem currently would have the geographic location of the mobiledevice. Using the PSTN's public phone network database it would queryfor a list of devices within the mobile devices telecommunicationsub-region. These sub-regions are determined by the telecommunicationscompany, and having indicated a particular region, the system can thenretrieve all public device phone numbers.

Having done this, the phone numbers can then be submitted again to thePSTN to resolve their addresses. Using commonly known techniques thesystem can then calculate the distance form the user (user's device) tothe public phone(s) retrieved from the PSTN. The nearest device wouldthen be chosen. This device and its address would then be sent to theuser via the messaging capability of the phone, possible using wirelessinternet or other e-mobility techniques. The user may accept or rejectthe location. If the user accepts the location then the user would havecalls that were routed to his mobile devices, rerouted to the publicdevice. If the user rejects the location, subsequent locations based ondistance can be presented (closest to furthest). The user may againeither at any time, add a private number, accept the public location, orturn off routing.

Determining Fixed (Private) Phones Near to User

If the user has entered a list of private numbers in the configurationfile, or adds a private number when no device in its proximity is found,the system can apply a simpler technique than above. The system can usethe features of the LTS to its advantage by setting alert modes. Thesealert modes will be to create a custom tracking criteria for the device.The tracking criteria would be to create circular regions with a radiusfound in the configuration file, and instruct the LTS to alert theprogram when a user enters/exists these regions. Thus two options canexist when a user activates tracking: a user turns on tracking while ina region, a user turns on tracking while not in a region. If the user isnot in a region then the system will not receive a message from the LTS,it can then as above, ask the user if they wish to search for a publicdevice.

A second option should be to allow the user to disable public devicesearching. Thus, a user may not be near a routable location (based onlocations in a configuration file) but when a user does enter a region,the system will be alerted by the LTS. When the system is alerted of auser entering a specific region near a listed private phone, then thesystem will route calls to this device. Conversely, when the user existsthis region, the LTS will again notify the system and the users callswill not be routed. As before with the public system, the user (user'sdevice) will be sent a message to ask if routing preferences should bechanged. The user can chose to accept new routing or decline it. Ifrouting is declined, then the system will ignore the LTS alert when theuser exists the region of the private line. It should however thenreceive the alert when a user enters another private device region andagain prompt the user.

Determining Mobile Phone Near to User

When in the above case a user places in his configuration, or whenprompted to add a private device (via a message sent to the mobiledevice), a routing destination that is itself a mobile device the systemmust add another subroutine to handle this. The procedure above for aprivate fixed land phone is the same until the location for the deviceat the PSTN is queried. At this point, the PSTN would return a resultthat indicates that the device is a mobile phone. The PSTN would alsoindicate the service provider for the device.

With this information there are 3 different ways to obtain the locationof the device. The first approach is to use the ULDC network to retrievethe devices location. A second, is to query the service provider(possibly the same service provider as the active user) through acooperative data sharing agreement and retrieve the mobile location on aULD. The third option is to directly query a BSCIMTX for information toresolve the mobiles location.

When the tracking system is activated, all number indicated to be mobilenumbers will require the system to periodically refresh the location ofthe devices. This time between refreshing can be configured by a systemconfiguration parameter. When the device is refreshed, a new trackingcriteria will be submitted to the LTS and the old criteria deleted.Besides these alteration, the system works just as it did for the landfixed device routing.

System Routing Change

When the mobile device has a new forwarding location the system thenforwards this new phone number to the routing ability function of thecellular network. This allows external requests from outside the MTX(incoming calls) to be forwarded to a new number supplied from thecurrent embodiment.

Methods to Alert User of Device of Routing Information

Many methods in current software and hardware designs of cellularnetworks exists to allow 2 direction communication from a softwareprogram on a MTX/Intranet to communicative with a mobile device. Methodswhich exist now that can accomplish the necessary tasks are:

-   -   SMS    -   Wireless Internet    -   WML    -   Proprietary Software

These methods would require the user to respond in some cases. Thesystem would then receive a response from the user, which would containthe users phone ID thus allowing the system to route the response to theparticular mobiles preferences and routing queues.

Geographic Advertising System Summary

The geographic advertising system (GAS) is a geographically basedadvertising system which enables the delivery of targeted advertising toand from wireless device users based on their geographic location. GASmonitors the movement of wireless users via monitoring hardware andsoftware connected to a wireless network or user location database, andwhen a wireless device meets a certain criteria, the wireless deviceuser may by targeted for an advertising solicitation. For example, auser of a wireless device who has traveled outside his home callingarea, may receive a text message on his wireless device telling him of adiscount on a hotel room in the area.

A business initiated solicitation to a wireless device may be triggeredby:

-   Distance between wireless device and soliciting business-   Location of the wireless device's home calling area-   Demographic information (age, sex, race, etc.)-   Historic travel patterns-   If wireless device is currently geographically located at a    particular location (For example, shopping at the competition's    store)-   Other defined criteria

The solicitation may be delivered by;

-   A text message to the wireless device-   A phone call to a wireless device-   A message deposited in the users voice mail-   An e-mail-   Postal mail

A user of a wireless device may also initiate a solicitation by, forexample, requesting the prices of hotel rooms within a given geographicradius.

For a user initiated solicitation, the user may sort by:

-   Type of goods and services-   Name of business providing goods and services-   Price of goods and services-   Distance to goods and services-   Other defined criteria

This GAS can work in conjunction with the DAN or other mapping softwareto provide driving directions, for example, to the hotel which issoliciting the user.

Acronyms

BSC BASE STATION CONTROLER BSS MANAGER BASE STATION SUBSYSTEM MANAGERBTS BASESTATION TRANSCIEVER SUBSYSTEM GPS GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM HLRHOME LOCATION REGISTER MTX METROPOLITAN TELEPHONY EXCHANGE PSTN PULBLICSWITCH TELEPHONY NETWORK RF RADIO FREQUENCY RSSI RECEIVE STRENGTH SIGNALTDOA TIME DIFFERENCE OF ARRIVAL ULD USER LOCATION DATABASE ULDC USERLOCATION DATABASE COORDINATOR ULDCN USER LOCATION DATABASE COORDINATORNETWORK ULDM USER LOCATION DATABASE MANAGER

What is claimed is:
 1. A wireless network, comprising: at least twowireless devices each communicating via radio frequency signals; asystem of computers programmed to perform steps of referencingperformance of at least one of the at least two wireless devices withwireless network known parameters and routinely storing performance datafor the at least one of the at least two wireless devices; and a radiotower adapted to receive the radio frequency signals from, and transmitthe radio frequency signals to, the at least one of the at least twowireless devices, wherein the system of computers further receives theperformance data and suggests at least one corrective action obtainedfrom a list of possible causes for the radio tower based upon theperformance data for the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices, wherein the radio tower generates an error code based uponoperation of the at least one of the at least two wireless devices, andwherein the system of computers is further programmed to receive theerror code from the radio tower and selectively suggests the at leastone corrective action as a corrective action of the radio frequencysignals of the radio tower in order to restrict processing of the radiofrequency signals from the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices based upon the error code, and whereby the system of computerssuggests the at least one corrective action in order to improvecommunication with the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices.
 2. The wireless network of claim 1, wherein the system ofcomputers routinely stores updated performance data of the at least oneof the at least two wireless devices while the at least one of the atleast two wireless devices is communicating with the radio tower.
 3. Thewireless network of claim 1, wherein the radio tower is a first radiotower, and further comprising a second radio tower, wherein the systemof computers is programmed, based upon the error code, to suggest acorrective adjustment of the radio frequency signals of the second radiotower in order to direct processing of signals from the at least one ofthe at least two wireless devices based upon the error code, whereby thesystem of computers suggests a corrective action of the radio frequencysignals of the first radio tower and the second radio tower in order toimprove communication with one or more of the at least two wirelessdevices based on the error code.
 4. The wireless network of claim 3,wherein the system of computers is further programmed to perform adiagnostic routine on the error code, on the first radio tower, on thesecond radio tower, and generate a diagnostic analysis for adjustingradio frequency signal power parameters associated with the first radiotower and with the second radio tower.
 5. The wireless network of claim4, wherein the system of computers is further programmed to adjust theradio frequency signal power parameters of the first radio tower and thesecond radio tower in response to the diagnostic analysis.
 6. Thewireless network of claim 5, wherein the radio frequency signal powerparameters of the first radio tower and the second radio tower comprisepower reception and power transmission of the first radio tower and thesecond radio tower.
 7. The wireless network of claim 4, wherein thesystem of computers is programmed to transmit radio frequency signalpower parameter data and the diagnostic analysis to a user of anothercomputer other than the system of computers.
 8. The wireless network ofclaim 1, wherein the system of computers is further programmed to:receive the performance data from each of the at least two wirelessdevices; perform a diagnostic routine, in response to receiving theperformance data; generate a message identifying the performance data;and suggest correction for adjusting radio frequency signal powerparameters.
 9. The wireless network of claim 8, wherein, in response toperforming the diagnostic routine, the system of computers is furtherprogrammed to adjust the radio frequency signal power parameters of thefirst radio tower and of the second radio tower, the radio frequencysignal power parameters including power reception and power transmissionof the respective radio tower.
 10. The wireless network of claim 1,wherein the system of computers consists of a single computer.
 11. Thewireless network of claim 1, wherein the system of computers comprisesmultiple computers.
 12. A method of correcting performance ofcommunications with at least two wireless devices within a wirelessnetwork, the method comprising: communicating via radio frequencysignals with the at least two wireless devices; a system of computersreferencing performance of the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices with wireless network known parameters; the system of computersroutinely storing performance data for the at least one of the at leasttwo wireless devices; transmitting the radio frequency signals from aradio tower to the at least one of the at least two wireless devices;the radio tower receiving the radio frequency signals from the at leastone of the at least two wireless devices; the system of computersreceiving the performance data and suggesting corrective actionsobtained from a list of possible causes for the radio tower based uponthe performance data for the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices; the radio tower generating an error code based upon operationof the at least one of the at least two wireless devices; and the systemof computers receiving the error code from the radio tower, andselectively suggesting a corrective action of the radio frequencysignals of the radio tower in order to restrict processing of the radiofrequency signals from the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices based upon the error code, whereby the system of computerssuggests the corrective action in order to improve communication withthe at least one of the at least two wireless devices.
 13. The method ofclaim 12, further comprising the system of computers routinely storingupdated performance data of the at least one of the at least twowireless devices while the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices is communicating with the radio tower.
 14. The method of claim12, wherein the radio tower is a first radio tower, and wherein themethod further comprises: transmitting the radio frequency signals froma second radio tower to the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices; the second radio tower receiving the radio frequency signalsfrom the at least one of the at least two wireless devices; and thesystem of computers suggesting a corrective adjustment of the radiofrequency signals of the second radio tower based upon the error code inorder to direct processing of signals from the at least one of the atleast two wireless devices based upon the error code, whereby the systemof computers suggests a corrective action of the radio frequency signalsof the first radio tower and the second radio tower in order to improvecommunication with one or more of the at least two wireless devicesbased on the error code.
 15. The method of claim 14, further comprisingthe system of computers performing a diagnostic routine on the errorcode, on the first radio tower, on the second radio tower, andgenerating a diagnostic analysis for adjusting radio frequency signalpower parameters associated with the first radio tower and with thesecond radio tower.
 16. The method of claim 15, further comprising thesystem of computers adjusting the radio frequency signal powerparameters of the first radio tower and the second radio tower inresponse to the diagnostic analysis.
 17. The method of claim 16, whereinthe radio frequency signal power parameters of the first radio tower andthe second radio tower comprise power reception and power transmissionof the first radio tower and the second radio tower.
 18. The method ofclaim 15, further comprising the system of computers transmitting radiofrequency signal power parameter data and the diagnostic analysis to auser of another computer other than the system of computers.
 19. Themethod of claim 12, further comprising: the system of computersreceiving the performance data from each of the at least two wirelessdevices; the system of computers performing a diagnostic routine, inresponse to receiving the performance data; the system of computersgenerating a message identifying the performance data; and the system ofcomputers suggesting a correction for adjusting radio frequency signalpower parameters.
 20. The method of claim 19, further comprising, inresponse to performing the diagnostic routine, the system of computersadjusts the radio frequency signal power parameters of the first radiotower and of the second radio tower, the radio frequency signal powerparameters including power reception and power transmission of therespective radio tower.
 21. The method of claim 12, wherein the systemof computers consists of a single computer.
 22. The method of claim 12,wherein the system of computers comprises multiple computers.
 23. Awireless network, comprising: at least two wireless devices eachcommunicating via radio frequency signals; a system of computersprogrammed to perform steps of referencing performance of at least oneof the at least two wireless devices with wireless network knownparameters and routinely storing performance data for the at least oneof the at least two wireless devices; a first radio tower adapted toreceive the radio frequency signals from, and transmit the radiofrequency signals to, the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices, wherein the system of computers further receives theperformance data and suggests at least one corrective action obtainedfrom a list of possible causes for the first radio tower based upon theperformance data for the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices, wherein the first radio tower generates an error code basedupon operation of the at least one of the at least two wireless devices,wherein the system of computers is further programmed to receive theerror code from the first radio tower and selectively suggests the atleast one corrective action as a corrective action of the radiofrequency signals of the first radio tower in order to restrictprocessing of the radio frequency signals from the at least one of theat least two wireless devices based upon the error code, and whereby thesystem of computers suggests the at least one corrective action in orderto improve communication with the at least one of the at least twowireless devices, wherein the system of computers routinely storesupdated performance data of the at least one of the at least twowireless devices while the at least one of the at least two wirelessdevices is communicating with the first radio tower; and a second radiotower, wherein the system of computers is programmed, based upon theerror code, to suggest a corrective adjustment of the radio frequencysignals of the second radio tower in order to direct processing ofsignals from the at least one of the at least two wireless devices basedupon the error code, whereby the system of computers suggests acorrective action of the radio frequency signals of the first radiotower and the second radio tower in order to improve communication withone or more of the at least two wireless devices based on the errorcode, wherein the system of computers is further programmed to perform adiagnostic routine on the error code, on the first radio tower, on thesecond radio tower, and generate a diagnostic analysis for adjustingradio frequency signal power parameters associated with the first radiotower and with the second radio tower, wherein the system of computersis further programmed to adjust the radio frequency signal powerparameters including power reception and power transmission of the firstradio tower and the second radio tower in response to the diagnosticanalysis, wherein the system of computers is programmed to transmitradio frequency signal power parameter data and the diagnostic analysisto a user of another computer other than the system of computers,wherein the system of computers is further programmed to receive theperformance data from each of the at least two wireless devices, performa diagnostic routine, in response to receiving the performance data,generate a message identifying the performance data, and suggestcorrection for adjusting radio frequency signal power parameters.